SCAN FOR THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
CanadaU. S.
mopar.com/om
First Edition
_RUV_OM_EN_US
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or
scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Chrysler brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make
and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “Chrysler” (U.S. residents only).
©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
2022 Chrysler Voyager
OWNER’S MANUAL
CHRYSLER VOYAGER
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in
an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that
may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation
or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also
dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation,
pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while
driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Chrysler
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca
(Canada) or your local Chrysler brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far
below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend, or use
public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway motor vehicle can
expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure,
avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle.
This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them
on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in
substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/
Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet by calling 1-800-247-9753 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................................. 7
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................12
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................82
4 STARTING AND OPERATING .............................................................................................. 104
5 MULTIMEDIA .............................................................................................................................. 140
6 SAFETY ......................................................................................................................................... 158
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ..................................................................................................... 217
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................243
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................ 295
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ......................................................................................................301
11 INDEX .............................................................................................................................................305
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY...........................................................8
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.............8
SYMBOL GLOSSARY.................................................8
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ........................................................................ 12
Key Fob .............................................................12
SENTRY KEY ........................................................... 15
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................. 15
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition .........................15
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .......................... 17
How To Use Remote Start................................17
To Exit Remote Start Mode..............................18
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped........................................................18
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped........................................................18
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer
Activation — If Equipped ..................................19
Remote Start Cancel Message........................19
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED..... 19
To Arm The System .........................................19
To Disarm The System .....................................19
Rearming Of The System .................................20
DOORS.....................................................................20
Manual Door Locks — If Equipped ..................20
Power Door Locks — If Equipped.....................21
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry............21
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit —
If Equipped........................................................24
Manual Sliding Side Door ................................24
Power Sliding Side Door —
If Equipped........................................................24
Child Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors........................................................25
STEERING WHEEL ..................................................26
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column...................26
Heated Steering Wheel —
If Equipped........................................................27
SEATS ......................................................................27
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) —
If Equipped........................................................28
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)....................29
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) —
If Equipped........................................................41
Heated Seats ...................................................43
Adjustable Armrest (Front Seats) —
If Equipped........................................................43
Head Restraints ...............................................44
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION.........................47
Introducing Voice Recognition.........................47
Basic Voice Commands ...................................47
Get Started .......................................................47
Additional Information .....................................48
MIRRORS................................................................ 48
Inside Rearview Mirror.....................................48
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors —
If Equipped ......................................................48
Outside Mirrors ................................................49
Conversation Mirror .........................................49
Power Mirrors — If Equipped ..........................49
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature .....................50
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED............................. 50
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink® ......................................................50
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels............50
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device...................51
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage
Door Opener .....................................................51
Programming HomeLink® To A
Miscellaneous Device......................................52
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink®
Button ...............................................................52
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .........52
Security .............................................................53
Troubleshooting Tips........................................53
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................. 54
Multifunction Lever ..........................................54
Headlight Switch...............................................54
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
If Equipped........................................................55
High/Low Beam Switch....................................55
Flash-To-Pass ..................................................55
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped...............55
Headlight Time Delay — If Equipped ...............56
Lights-On Reminder..........................................56
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped........................56
Turn Signals......................................................56
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped..................57
Battery Protection ...........................................57
INTERIOR LIGHTS .................................................. 57
Interior Courtesy Lights ...................................57
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS ................ 58
Windshield Wiper Operation............................58
Rear Wiper And Washer...................................60
CLIMATE CONTROLS ............................................. 60
Manual Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions ..........................................................60
Operating Tips ..................................................65
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT............... 66
Storage..............................................................66
Sun Screens — If Equipped..............................69
USB/AUX Control .............................................69
Power Outlets ...................................................70
WINDOWS...............................................................72
Power Windows ................................................72
Automatic Window Features ...........................73
Reset Auto Up...................................................74
Wind Buffeting..................................................74
HOOD ...................................................................74
Opening.............................................................74
Closing ..............................................................75
LIFTGATE .................................................................75
To Unlock/Open The Liftgate...........................75
To Lock/Close The Liftgate..............................76
Power Liftgate — If Equipped...........................76
Cargo Area Features ....................................77
STOW ‘N PLACE ROOF RACK —
IF EQUIPPED ...........................................................77
Deploying The Crossbars .................................78
Stowing The Crossbars ....................................79
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .........................................82
Instrument Cluster Descriptions .....................83
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .........................................84
Instrument Cluster Descriptions .....................85
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ........................ 85
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls.............................................................86
Oil Life Reset ....................................................87
KeySense Cluster Messages —
If Equipped .......................................................87
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ........88
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped ......................................93
TRIP COMPUTER ................................................... 94
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ................... 95
Red Warning Lights..........................................95
Yellow Warning Lights......................................98
Yellow Indicator Lights.................................. 101
Green Indicator Lights .................................. 101
White Indicator Lights................................... 101
Blue Indicator Lights..................................... 101
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ......102
Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity................................... 102
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS...............................103
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE .......................................104
Normal Starting ............................................. 104
AutoPark ........................................................ 105
Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ............................ 107
After Starting — Warming Up The Engine..... 107
If Engine Fails To Start ................................. 107
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button...................................... 108
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED..........108
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS.........108
PARKING BRAKE .................................................109
Electric Park Brake (EPB) ............................. 109
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION..............................111
Ignition Park Interlock................................... 112
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System ........................................................... 113
9-Speed Automatic Transmission ............... 113
Gear Ranges .................................................. 113
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION ..........................116
POWER STEERING...............................................116
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED............. 117
Autostop Mode .............................................. 117
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop......................................................... 117
To Start The Engine While In Auto
Stop/Start...................................................... 118
To Manually Turn Off The
Stop/Start System......................................... 118
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System ........................................................... 119
System Malfunction ...................................... 119
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS —
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................ 119
Cruise Control................................................ 119
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED ....................................................... 121
ParkSense Sensors....................................... 122
ParkSense Warning Display ......................... 122
ParkSense Display ........................................ 122
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense.............. 125
Service The ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System ................................................ 125
Cleaning The ParkSense System ................. 125
ParkSense System Usage Precautions........ 125
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA............... 126
REFUELING THE VEHICLE................................... 127
VEHICLE LOADING .............................................. 128
Certification Label ......................................... 128
TRAILER TOWING ................................................129
Common Towing Definitions......................... 130
Trailer Hitch Classification............................ 131
Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)............... 132
Vehicle Loading Chart................................... 132
Trailer And Tongue Weight .......................... 134
Towing Requirements .................................. 134
Towing Tips ................................................... 136
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME)......................................137
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle ........................................................... 137
DRIVING TIPS .......................................................138
Driving On Slippery Surfaces........................ 138
Driving Through Water .................................. 138
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS..........................................140
CYBERSECURITY..................................................140
UCONNECT SETTINGS .........................................141
Customer Programmable Features ............. 141
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES......157
Regulatory And Safety Information.............. 157
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ..............................................158
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..................... 158
Rear Seat Reminder Alert (RSRA) ................ 159
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...... 159
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ..........................164
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped..................................................... 164
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped ............................... 168
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)............................................................ 171
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ....................174
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....... 174
Important Safety Precautions....................... 174
Seat Belt Systems ........................................ 175
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ...... 184
Child Restraints ........................................... 197
SAFETY TIPS ......................................................213
Transporting Passengers.............................. 213
Transporting Pets ....................................... 214
Safety Checks You Should Make
Inside The Vehicle ........................................ 214
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ...................................... 215
Exhaust Gas................................................... 216
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ......................... 216
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS......................... 217
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED ..... 217
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING —
IF EQUIPPED ..................................................... 220
Preparations For Jacking ............................. 221
Jack And Spare Tire Location ....................... 221
Equipment Removal ..................................... 221
Jacking Instructions .................................... 223
Road Tire Installation.................................... 226
Portable Air Compressor —
If Equipped..................................................... 227
Return Inflatable Spare Tire ....................... 228
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED .................... 228
JUMP STARTING.................................................. 234
Preparations For Jump Start ........................ 234
Jump Starting Procedure .............................. 235
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY –
IF EQUIPPED ....................................................... 236
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ........................... 237
MANUAL PARK RELEASE .................................. 238
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............................. 239
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ......................... 240
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) .................................................................. 242
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ........................ 242
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING.....................................243
Maintenance Plan......................................... 244
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ....................................247
3.6L Engine ................................................... 247
Checking Oil Level......................................... 248
Adding Washer Fluid .................................... 248
Maintenance-Free Battery ........................... 248
Pressure Washing ......................................... 249
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE .....................................249
Engine Oil ...................................................... 249
Engine Oil Filter ........................................... 250
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............................ 250
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection................... 250
Air Conditioner Maintenance ....................... 251
Body Lubrication ........................................... 253
Windshield Wiper Blades ............................. 253
Exhaust System ............................................ 256
Cooling System.............................................. 258
Brake System ................................................ 261
Automatic Transmission .............................. 262
Fuses.............................................................. 263
Bulb Replacement ........................................ 272
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
TIRES ....................................................................275
Tire Safety Information ................................. 275
Tires — General Information ......................... 282
Tire Types....................................................... 286
Spare Tires — If Equipped............................. 286
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care......................... 288
Snow Traction Devices ................................. 289
Tire Rotation Recommendations ................. 290
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES.....................291
Treadwear...................................................... 291
Traction Grades............................................. 291
Temperature Grades..................................... 291
STORING THE VEHICLE .......................................292
BODYWORK..........................................................292
Protection From Atmospheric Agents .......... 292
Body And Underbody Maintenance.............. 292
Preserving The Bodywork ............................. 292
INTERIORS ...........................................................293
Seats And Fabric Parts.................................. 293
Plastic And Coated Parts .............................. 294
Leather Surfaces........................................... 294
Glass Surfaces .............................................. 294
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)........ 295
BRAKE SYSTEM................................................... 295
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ................................................. 295
Torque Specifications ................................... 295
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ....................................... 296
3.6L Engine ................................................... 296
Reformulated Gasoline................................. 296
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends......................... 297
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles.......................................................... 297
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ...... 297
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline...................... 297
Materials Added To Fuel............................... 298
Fuel System Cautions ................................... 298
FLUID CAPACITIES .............................................. 299
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .................. 299
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................ 300
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE.............................................301
Prepare For The Appointment ...................... 301
Prepare A List ................................................ 301
Be Reasonable With Requests..................... 301
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .................................301
FCA US LLC Customer Center....................... 301
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .............. 301
Mexico............................................................ 302
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ............... 302
Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired
(TDD/TTY) ...................................................... 302
Service Contract ........................................... 302
WARRANTY INFORMATION................................303
MOPAR® PARTS .................................................303
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ..........................303
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C............................................ 303
In Canada ...................................................... 303
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ..........................304
GENERAL INFORMATION....................................304
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Chrysler vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its
customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before
driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the
text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced
throughout the Owner’s Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in
this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For
this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized
dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Chrysler vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine Mopar® parts, and
care about your satisfaction.
1
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of
each symbol
Ú page 95.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
WARNING!
These statements are against operating
procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements are against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation,
operation, and reliability. If not followed, may
result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier
use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information on
a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 95
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 95
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 95
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 96
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 96
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 96
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 97
Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 97
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Ú page 97
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 97
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 97
Red Warning Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 97
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 97
Vehicle Security Warning Light
Ú page 98
Yellow Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 98
Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
Ú page 98
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
Ú page 98
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
Ú page 98
Red Warning Lights
1
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
Ú page 99
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 99
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
Ú page 99
Service Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) Warning Light
Ú page 99
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
Ú page 99
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Ú page 100
Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Indicator Lights
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) OFF Indicator Light
Ú page 101
Green Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
Ú page 101
Front Fog Indicator Light
Ú page 101
KeySense Indicator Light
Ú page 101
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
Ú page 101
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
Ú page 101
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 101
Green Indicator Lights White Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 101
Set Speed Display
Ú page 101
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 101
1
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which
supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE), Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), and
Remote Start (if equipped). The key fob allows you
to lock or unlock all doors and liftgate, as well as
activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not
need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system. The key fob also contains an emergency
key, which is stored in the rear of the key fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the key fob
become depleted. The emergency key is also for
locking/unlocking the glove compartment. You can
keep the emergency key with you when valet
parking.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if
the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device. This may
result in poor performance.
A low key fob battery condition may be indicated
by a message in the instrument cluster display,
or by the LED light on the key fob. If the LED key
fob light no longer illuminates from key fob
button pushes, then the key fob battery requires
replacement.
The key fob LED light brightness is designed for
indoor light viewing, so the LED light may not be
visible in direct sunlight
Ú page 304.
Key Fob
1 — LED Light
2 — Unlock
3 — Liftgate
4 — Left Power Sliding Side Door
5 — Emergency Key
6 — Lock
7 — Remote Start
8 — Right Power Sliding Side Door
9 — PANIC Alarm
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob
once to unlock the driver’s front door and sliding
door or twice within five seconds to unlock all
doors and the liftgate. Push and release the lock
button on the key fob to lock all doors and the
liftgate.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will
flash and the illuminated entry system will be
activated. When the doors are locked, the turn
signals will flash and the horn will chirp. Settings in
the Uconnect system can change to lights only,
chirp only, or both.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ —
Passive Entry
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is
open, the doors can be locked. The doors will
unlock again only if the key fob is inside the
passenger compartment.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first
push of the unlock button within the Uconnect
system
Ú page 141.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is one
CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin
battery dimensions may not meet the original
OEM coin battery dimensions.
Batteries contain harmful chemicals. Dispose
old batteries by placing them in correct
containers according to the law or by taking
them to a dealership, where they will be handled
appropriately.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate
for further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by pushing the
mechanical release button on the side of the
key fob with your thumb and then pulling the
key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Insert a coin or a flat blade screwdriver into the
now exposed slot and carefully pry on both
sides to disengage the snaps. Gently remove
the back cover from the fob, being careful not
to damage any of the snaps.
3. Remove the battery by sliding the battery
rearward in its pocket until the battery lifts up.
Remove the depleted battery from the battery
pocket and dispose appropriately.
4. Fit a new CR2032 battery ensuring that the
positive (+) side is facing upwards. Push the
battery into the pocket until it is firmly seated
in place and secured under both tabs.
5. Align the back cover into its original position
and snap it back in place by pushing it against
the fob until it is seated all around.
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never
been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to
match the vehicle locks.
KeySense Features — If Equipped
This feature provides the vehicle owner with the
ability to customize vehicle settings for the driving
experience for other drivers of the vehicle. The
vehicle settings are protected by a unique
four-digit PIN, which the vehicle owner creates
when accessing the specific settings for the first
time.
KeySense also has additional features that are
always enabled when the specific key is in use that
cannot be set by the vehicle owner. While this
specific key fob is in use, the vehicle will respond
accordingly to the customized vehicle settings and
mandatory features. This includes enhanced
driving assistance features, increased driver
alerts, and the locking of certain optional features.
Settings can be customized within the Uconnect
system
Ú page 141.
KeySense Key Fob
KeySense Unique Splash Screen
At start-up the KeySense splash screen should
inform the driver that the vehicle will be
functioning in KeySense mode when the KeySense
key is in use.
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell
battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a
chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell battery is
swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns
in just two hours and can lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swal-
lowed or placed inside any part of the body,
seek immediate medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from chil-
dren. If the battery compartment does not
close securely, stop using the product and
keep it away from children.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
Always place the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition
in the OFF position.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
Start Up Display Features
Unique splash screen graphic
Telltale illuminated
After unique splash screen, and after stored
messages are cycled, then start-up KeySense
messages (Range & Max Speed) are displayed
The following features are always enabled when
this key is in use:
Entertainment audio muted if front row occu-
pied seat belts are not fastened
Consistent seat belt unfastened chime
Maximum radio volume limited to 15 out of 39
Daytime Running Lights
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed or
activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of
whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore,
only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system cannot reprogram a key fob obtained from
another vehicle.
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on
after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a
problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates
that someone attempted to start the engine with
an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob
is used to start the engine but there is an issue
with the vehicle electronics, the engine will start
and shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than
10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the
electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible by an authorized
dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle
have been programmed to the vehicle electronics
Ú page 304.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as long as
the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has four
operating positions; three of which are labeled and
will illuminate when in position. The three positions
are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is
START. During START, RUN will illuminate.
START/STOP Ignition Button
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket Remote Start
systems. Use of these systems may result in
vehicle starting problems and loss of security
protection.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — ON/RUN
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped
Some electrical devices
(e.g. power locks, alarm, etc.) are still available
ACC
The engine is stopped
Some electrical devices are available
(e.g. power windows)
ON/RUN
Driving position
All electrical devices are available
(e.g. climate controls, etc.)
START
The engine will start
(when foot is on the brake pedal)
The engine only runs in the ON/RUN ignition
position or from a Remote Start request.
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
depleted battery. In this situation, a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition switch.
Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency
key) of the key fob against the START/STOP
ignition button and push to operate the ignition
switch.
Backup Starting Method
NOTE:
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ system if it is located next
to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic
device; these devices may block the key fob’s
wireless signal and prevent the Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™ system from starting the vehicle.
For the proper engine starting procedure, see
Ú page 104.
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in
the ON/RUN position. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation. Always remove
the key fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING!
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security.
The system has a range of 328 ft
(100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather and to reach a comfortable climate in all
ambient conditions before the customer enters the
vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range
Ú page 304.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the
horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.
Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts
the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button and
place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut down in
10 seconds.
The parking lights will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window operations are
disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start
mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion before the Remote Start sequence can be
repeated for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before
the engine will Remote Start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Liftgate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
PANIC button not pushed
System not disabled from previous Remote
Start event
Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
Ignition in OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intru-
sion
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not
illuminated
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and
can cause serious injury or death when
inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start
system, either push and release the unlock button
on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the
vehicle using Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry
via the door handles, and disarm the Vehicle
Security system (if equipped). Then, prior to the
end of the 15 minute cycle, push and release the
START/STOP ignition button.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if
the Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed
again, or if the engine is allowed to run for the
entire 15 minute cycle. Once the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position, the climate controls will
resume previously set operations (temperature,
blower control, etc.).
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™ — Passive Entry feature, the message
“Remote Start Active — Push Start Button” will
show in the instrument cluster display until you
push the START/STOP ignition button.
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable for two seconds after receiving a
valid Remote Start request.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the
system will automatically activate front defrost for
15 minutes or less. The time is dependent on the
ambient temperature. Once the timer expires, the
system will automatically adjust the settings
depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote
Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next
section for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear
defrost will automatically turn on in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel and driver heated seat
feature will also turn on if programmed in the
comfort menu screen within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 141. In warm weather, the driver vented
seat feature will automatically turn on when the
Remote Start is activated, if programmed via the
comfort menu screen. The vehicle will adjust the
climate control settings depending on the outside
ambient temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
The climate controls automatically adjust to an
optimal temperature and mode, dependent upon
the outside ambient temperature. When the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the
climate controls will resume their previous
settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or
below, the climate settings will default to
maximum heat, with fresh air entering the
cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the
vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to
78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be based
on the last settings selected by the driver.
In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or
above, the climate settings will default to MAX
A/C, Bi-Level mode, and Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate
control settings, see
Ú page 60.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and
can cause serious injury or death when
inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration
of Remote Start until the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. The climate control settings will
change, and exit automatic operation, if manually
adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is in
Remote Start mode. This includes the OFF button
on the climate controls, which will turn the system
off.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER
D
E-ICER ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When the Remote Start system is active and the
outside ambient temperature is less than 33°F
(0.6°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate.
Exiting Remote Start will resume its previous
operation. If the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was
active, the timer and operation will continue.
REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster if the vehicle fails to Remote
Start or exits Remote Start prematurely:
Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Cancelled — Liftgate Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Too Cold
Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle
doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition
switch for unauthorized operation. When the alarm
is activated, the interior switches for door locks,
power sliding doors and power liftgate are
disabled. The Vehicle Security system provides
both audible and visible signals. If something
triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security system will
provide the following audible and visible signals:
the horn will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn
signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in
the instrument cluster will flash.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in
the OFF position.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™ — Passive Entry, make sure the vehicle
ignition system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock
the vehicle:
Push lock on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger
door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a valid key fob avail-
able in the same exterior zone
Ú page 21.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using
any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle (if equipped)
Ú page 21.
Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™ — Passive Entry, push the keyless igni-
tion START/STOP ignition button (requires
at least one valid key fob in the vehicle).
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate
button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
The Vehicle Security system remains armed
during power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate
button will not disarm the Vehicle Security
system. If someone enters the vehicle through
the liftgate and opens any door, the alarm will
sound.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the
interior power door lock switches will not unlock
the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create conditions
where the system will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously described arming sequences has
occurred, the Vehicle Security system will arm
regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not.
If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the
alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle
Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
Security system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash,
and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm and no action is
taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will
turn the horn off after a 29 second cycle (with five
seconds between cycles and up to eight cycles if
the trigger remains active) and then rearm itself.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on
each door trim panel forward. To unlock the front
doors, pull the inside door handle to the first detent
or rotate the door lock button until the ribbing is
visible. To unlock the rear doors, rotate the door
lock button until the red indicator is visible.
Manual Front Door Lock
Manual Rear Door Lock Location
If the door lock button is locked (no ribbing is
visible) when you shut the door, the door will lock.
Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE:
The manual door locks will not lock or unlock the
liftgate.
1 — Door Handle
2 — Manual Door Lock
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
POWER DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Driver Power Door Lock Switches
If you push the power door lock switch while the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any
front door is open, the power locks will not operate.
This prevents you from accidentally locking your
keys in the vehicle. Placing the ignition in the OFF
position or closing the door will allow the locks to
operate. A chime will sound if the ignition is in the
ACC or ON/RUN position and a door is open, as a
reminder to place the ignition in the OFF position
and remove the key fob.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE
E
NTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a
feature of Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob
lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off
through the Uconnect system
Ú page 141.
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
passive entry system if it is located next to a
mobile phone, laptop, or other electronic device;
these devices may block the key fob’s wireless
signal and prevent the passive entry handle
from locking/unlocking the vehicle.
If set by the customer in the Uconnect Settings,
unlocking with Passive Entry will initiate
illuminated approach (low beams, license plate
lamp, position lamps) for the time 0, 30, 60 or
90 seconds. Passive Entry also initiates two
flashes of the turn signals.
If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/
snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a
slower response time.
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the event
of a collision, lock the vehicle doors before you
drive as well as when you park and leave the
vehicle.
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury
or damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the keyless ignition is in the OFF position,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock
the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in
the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and
no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will relock and will arm the security
system (if equipped).
The sliding side doors can be unlocked from the
outside using the Passive Entry system.
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side:
With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door
handle, grab the handle to unlock the vehicle.
Grabbing the driver’s door handle will unlock the
driver’s side doors (driver/sliding door)
automatically. Grabbing the front passenger door
handle to unlock all four doors and the liftgate
automatically. The interior door panel lock knob
will rotate when the door is unlocked.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock
when you grab hold of the front driver’s door
handle, depending on the selected setting in the
Uconnect system
Ú page 141.
All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive
Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature.
There are three situations that trigger a
FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid key fob while a
door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel switch
while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open
doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be
executed. If it detects a key fob inside the car, and
it does not detect any key fob outside the car, then
the car will unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the
vehicle, and no valid key fob is detected outside
the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors
when any of the following conditions are met:
The doors are manually locked using the door
lock knobs.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then the doors
are closed.
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
Entry door handle.
NOTE:
On the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the key
fob can be locked in the vehicle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s key fobs within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handle, push the door handle lock button to lock all
four doors and the liftgate.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the
door handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you must
wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door
handle. This is done to allow you to check if the
vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle,
without the vehicle unlocking.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the
key fob battery is depleted.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built
into the electronic liftgate release button. With a
valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, push the electronic liftgate release button
for a power open on vehicles equipped with Power
Liftgate. Pull the electronic liftgate handle and lift
for Manual Liftgate vehicles.
Electronic Liftgate
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry lock
button located to the right of the liftgate release
handle.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the
key fob lock button, or the lock button located on
the vehicle’s interior door panel
Ú page 304.
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release Handle
2 — Passive Entry Lock Button
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature
unlocks all of the vehicle doors when any door is
opened. This will occur only after the gear selector
has been placed into the PARK position, after the
vehicle has been driven (the gear selector has
been placed out of PARK and all doors closed).
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will
not operate if there is any manual operation of the
door locks (lock or unlock).
This feature can be turned on or off in the
Uconnect system
Ú page 141.
MANUAL SLIDING SIDE DOOR
The sliding door may be opened from the inside or
the outside. Pull outward on the exterior handle to
open the sliding door. The sliding door inside
handle functions by rocking forward and back.
Rocking the handle backwards opens the door and
rocking forward releases the hold open latch in
order to close the door.
Side Door Handle And Lock Functions
To keep your door operating properly, observe the
following guidelines:
Always open the door smoothly.
Avoid high impacts against the door stop when
opening the door. This is very important when
your vehicle is parked on an incline as the door
will slide faster in the downhill direction.
There is a hold-open latch that is activated when
the sliding door is fully opened. This latch will
keep your sliding door open on any incline. To
close the sliding door after the hold-open latch
is activated, you must rock the inside handle
forward or pull outward on the exterior handle.
Always make sure that the sliding door is fully
latched anytime the vehicle is in motion.
NOTE:
The left side sliding door cannot be opened while
the fuel door is open.
POWER SLIDING SIDE DOOR —
I
F EQUIPPED
The power sliding door may be power opened or
closed in several ways:
Key fob
Inside or outside handles
Buttons located:
In the overhead console
Just inside the sliding door
On the outside handle
Push the button on the key fob twice
within five seconds to open, close, or
reverse a power sliding door.
The key fob and the overhead console button will
operate the door when the door is locked. All other
ways require the sliding door to be unlocked. If the
vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, pressing
the button on the outside handle will unlock and
open the sliding door, with a valid Passive Entry key
fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle.
1 — Door Handle
2 — Door Lock
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
Overhead Console Power Switches
There are power sliding side door switches located
on the B-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power
sliding door for the rear seat passengers.
To operate the sliding door manually with the
handles or to avoid unintentional operation of the
power sliding doors from the rear seats, push the
power sliding door power off button, located in the
overhead console, to remove power to the handles
and buttons just inside the sliding doors. The
power off LED, in the overhead console, will be lit
when the handles are manual. When the LED is lit,
pushing the power sliding door power off button
will return the handles to power operation.
NOTE:
If anything obstructs the power sliding side door
while it is closing or opening, the door will auto-
matically reverse to the closed or open position
and an audible tone will sound, provided it
meets sufficient resistance. The turn signals will
flash with sliding door movements.
If the power sliding door stops in the middle due
to obstacles, it will power open on the next
command.
Power Sliding Side Door Switch (Left Side Shown)
CHILD PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children
riding in the rear seats, the sliding doors are
equipped with a Child Protection Door Lock
system.
1 — Liftgate
2 — Left Sliding Door
3 — Sliding Door Power Off
4 — Right Sliding Door
WARNING!
Personal injury or cargo damage may occur if
caught in the path of the sliding door. Make
sure the door path is clear before closing the
door.
Before driving off, check the instrument
cluster for a sliding door or door open
message or warning indicator. Failure to do
this could result in unintentionally leaving the
sliding door open while driving.
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Engage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. On the rear of the sliding door, slide the Child
Protection Door Lock control inward (toward
the vehicle) to engage the Child Protection
Door Lock.
Child Protection Door Locks
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding
door.
NOTE:
After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock,
always test the inside door handle with the
sliding door closed to make certain the Child
Protection Door Lock is in the locked position.
After disengaging the Child Protection Door
Lock, always test the inside door handle with the
sliding door closed to make certain the Child
Protection Door Lock is in the unlocked position.
The inside door handle will not open the sliding
door when the Child Protection Door Lock is
engaged.
The power sliding door will operate from the
switch located just inside the sliding door,
regardless of the Child Protection Door Lock
lever position.
To avoid unintentional operation of the power
sliding door from the rear seats, push the
Sliding Door Power Off button, located in the
overhead console. When the overhead console
power OFF LED is lit, the sliding door may not be
power opened or closed when pushing the
buttons just inside the sliding doors, or when
pulling on the handles.
To Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control
outward (away from the vehicle) to disengage
the Child Protection Door Lock.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding
door.
NOTE:
After disengaging (or engaging) the Child
Protection Door Lock, always test the inside door
handle with the sliding door closed to make certain
the Child Protection Door Lock is in the desired
position. The inside door handle will open the
sliding door when the Child Protection Door Lock is
disengaged.
STEERING WHEEL
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen
or shorten the steering column. The tilt/
telescoping lever is located left of the steering
wheel at the end of the steering column.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the sliding doors
cannot be opened from the inside door handle
when the Child Protection Door Locks are
engaged.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
(Continued)
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the lever
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering
column, move the steering wheel upward or
downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the
steering column, pull the steering wheel outward
or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
I
F EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating
element that helps warm your hands in
cold weather. The heated steering wheel
has only one temperature setting. Once
the heated steering wheel has been turned on, it
will stay on for an average of 80 minutes before
automatically shutting off. This time will vary based
on environmental temperatures. The heated
steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on
when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel button is located within
the Uconnect system. You can access the button
through the Comfort screen.
Press the heated steering wheel button once to
turn the heating element on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see
Ú page 18.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system
of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or
driving with the steering column unlocked, could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
conditions must exercise care when using the
steering wheel heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or steering wheel covers of any type or mate-
rial. This may cause the steering wheel heater
to overheat.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS)
— I
F EQUIPPED
Manual Front Adjuster
Both front seats are adjustable forward or
rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle is
located under the seat cushion at the front edge of
each seat.
Manual Seat Adjustment
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and
slide the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar
once you have reached the desired position. Then,
using body pressure, move forward and rearward
on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
Manual Seat Height Adjustment
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered
by using a lever, located on the outboard side of
the seat. Pump the lever upward to raise the seat
height or pump the lever downward to lower the
seat height.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
For models equipped with manual seats, the
recline lever is located on the outboard side of the
seat.
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever and
push back to the desired position and release the
lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to return the
seatback to its normal position. Using body
pressure, lean forward and rearward on the seat to
be sure the seatback has latched.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be adjusted properly and you could
be injured. Adjust the seat only while the
vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally
injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle
is parked.
WARNING!
1 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Handle
2 — Height Adjustment
3 — Recline Lever
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
Manual Forward/Rearward Adjustment —
Quad Seats (If Equipped)
Both second row seats are adjustable forward or
rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle is
located under the seat cushion at the front edge of
each seat.
Manual Rear Seat Adjuster
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and
slide the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar
once you have reached the desired position. Then,
using body pressure, move forward and rearward
on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
Manual Recline — Quad Seats
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious injury
or death.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be adjusted properly and you could
be injured. Adjust the seat only while the
vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally
injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle
is parked.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, and
push back to the desired position and release the
lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to return the
seatback to its normal position. Using body
pressure, lean forward and rearward on the seat to
be sure the seatback has latched.
Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped
The second row bench seat can accommodate two
passengers, while providing easy access to the
third row seats without any folding of the second
row seats.
To recline the seatback, lean forward slightly, lift
the recline lever located on the outboard side of
the seat cushion, and push back to the desired
position and release the lever. Lean forward and
lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal
position. Using body pressure, lean forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has
latched.
Recline Lever
The bench seat does not stow in the floor, but is
removable for added cargo space.
Removing The Bench Seat
1. Adjust the driver and passenger seats
forward to allow room for the bench seat
removal.
2. Raise the armrest completely, then lift the
recline lever located on the outboard side of
the seat to fold the seatback flat against the
seat cushion.
Folded Position
3. Pull the release strap located behind the seat,
in the center near the floor to release the
latches.
Release Strap Location
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious injury
or death.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
4. Once the latches are released, tilt the entire
seat toward the front of the vehicle. The seat
can now be removed through either sliding
side door, or through the liftgate.
Tilt Bench Seat Forward
NOTE:
Due to the weight of the bench seat, it is recom-
mended that two people are utilized for its
removal.
When storing the removed bench seat, it is
important to keep the seatback in the folded
position.
Reinstalling The Bench Seat
1. To reinstall the bench seat, align the seats
front attachments into the detent positions
on the floor.
2. Tilt seat rearward to lock the seatback into its
original position.
NOTE:
Push downward to ensure the rear latches are in
the locked position.
3. Lift the recline handle and return the seatback
to the seating position.
Second Row Removable 8th Seat —
If Equipped
While the 8th seat does not stow in the floor, it is
foldable and removable for added cargo space.
Second Row 8th Seat Fold Flat Strap
The release strap is located on the front of the
seat, near the floor. To remove the seat, pull the
release strap to release the rear latches. The seat
assembly can now be removed from the vehicle by
moving it in a rearward direction from the detent
positions in the floor.
Release Strap
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the seat could become
loose. Personal injuries could result.
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Seat can be removed easier with one outboard
seat stowed in the load floor.
To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the detent
positions on the floor. Tilt seat rearward to lock the
seatback into its original position.
In Floor Detent Guides
Fold-Flat — Quad Seats
To fold the seat, lift the recliner lever to the full
upward position and push the seatback forward
until it rests on the seat cushion.
Fold-Flat Seat Recline Lever
NOTE:
The seatback may lock into the fold-flat position.
Use the recline lever to unlock the seatback.
If equipped with Stow ‘n Go seating: when
returning the seat to the original position, the
headrest must be folded back to the original
position.
Stow ‘n Go Seating Head Restraint
Easy Entry
Easy Tilt Seat — With Or Without Child Seat
Installed
The second row seats can be tilted forward for easy
entry into the third row with or without a child seat
installed.
1. Located in the seatback of the second row
seat is a lever (or handle for Stow ‘n Go seats)
that provides easier access to the third row by
tilting the seat forward.
2. Slide the lever upwards, or if equipped, pull the
handle forward, to unlock the seatback.
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the seat could become
loose. Personal injuries could result.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
Lift Easy Tilt Seat Lever (If Equipped)
Pull Easy Tilt Seat Handle (If Equipped)
3. Push on seatback to slide seat forward to
access the third row.
Easy Tilt Seat
Easy Tilt With Child Seat Installed
4. To put the seat back into original position, just
pull back on the seatback and lock the seat
into position.
Easy Entry — With The Seat Folded Flat
The seats can be folded and tilted for more
accessibility for passengers to enter and exit the
third row.
1. Without a child seat installed, you can fold the
seat by pulling the recliner handle on the
bottom part of the seat. Before pulling the
recliner lever, make sure the arm rests are
folded up.
Recliner Lever
WARNING!
Do not use this feature with a child in seat.
Serious injury or death may occur.
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. To put it back into position, pull back on the
folded seat and make sure that it locks into
position. Then, pull the seatback toward the
back and fold down the arm rests.
Exit For Third Row Passengers — Stow ‘n Go Seats
Only
If the second row is equipped with Stow ‘n Go, third
row passengers can pull the strap and push the
seat forward to fold the seatback down and tilt the
seat to the floor for an easy exit.
Pull Strap For Third Row Passengers
NOTE:
This process is for when there is no child seat
installed. Use the easy entry lever if a child seat is
installed.
Second Row Removable Quad Seat
The second row quad seats, not equipped with the
Stow ‘n Go feature, are removable for added cargo
space.
Removing Seat
1. Adjust seat to the full rearward position.
2. Lift the recline lever to fold the seatback flat
against the seat cushion.
Fold-Flat Seat Recline Lever
NOTE:
Push downward on the seatback to make sure it is
in the locked position.
3. The release strap is located on the front of the
seat, near the floor.
Seat Release Strap
4. To remove the seat, pull the release strap to
release the rear latches.
5. Tilt the back of the seat to the upward position.
Tilt Seat Forward
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
6. The seat assembly can now be removed from
the vehicle. Grab the front seatback edge
located near the head restraint and the grab
the bar on the rear side of the seat cushion for
easy removal.
Seat Removal
Reinstalling Seat
1. To reinstall the seat: With the seat tilted
forward, align the seat’s front attachments
into the detent positions on the floor.
In Floor Seat Detents
Installing Seat
2. Tilt seat rearward to lock the seat back into its
original position.
NOTE:
Push downward to ensure the rear latches are in
the locked position.
3. Lift the recline handle and return the seat back
to the seating position.
Manually Folding Third Row Seats —
If Equipped
1. Lower the center head restraint down to the
seatback by pushing the button on the guide
and pushing the head restraint down.
2. Pull release strap marked “1” to release the
anchors.
Release Strap “1”
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the seat could become
loose. Personal injuries could result.
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull release strap marked “2” and tumble the
seat rearward into the storage bin.
Release Strap “2”
Stowed Third Row Seat
To Unfold Third Row Seats
1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out
of the storage bin and push the seat forward
until the anchors latch.
Assist Straps
2. Pulling strap “2” releases the seatback to
return to its full upright position.
Strap “2”
3. Raise the head restraint to its upright position.
Stow 'n Go Seating
On vehicles equipped with Stow 'n Go seating, the
second and third row seats can be folded into the
floor for convenient storage.
AUTO ADVANCE ‘N RETURN — IF EQUIPPED
On vehicles equipped with the Auto Advance ‘n
Return feature, the front seat will move forward
automatically to a location that will allow the
second row Stow ‘n Go seat movement, without
interference by the front seat. After the second row
seat is stowed, the front seat will move back to the
previous location once the Auto Advance ‘n Return
button is pushed again.
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle
could be injured if seats are not properly
latched to their floor attachments. Always be
sure the seats are fully latched.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury
or death in a collision. Always make sure the
head restraints are in their upright positions
when the seat is to be occupied.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
The Auto Advance ‘n Return feature is available to
the front driver power seats.
A one-touch Auto Advance ‘n Return button is
located on the B-pillar trim panel, just in front of
the power sliding door.
Auto Advance ‘n Return Button
Using the Auto Advance ‘n Return Feature
NOTE:
The button is only functional when the power
sliding door is open and the vehicle is in PARK.
If the door is not open or the vehicle is not in
PARK when the button is pushed, the front seat
will not move and a message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
If the power sliding door is closing when the
button is pushed, the front seat will not move
and a message will be displayed in the instru-
ment cluster display.
The Auto Advance ‘n Return feature will not
function if the front doors are open.
1. Push and release the Auto Advance ‘n Return
button.
2. Perform the second row Stow ‘n Go seat
movement. Refer to “Second Row Stow ‘n Go”
in this section for further information.
3. Push and release the Auto Advance ‘n Return
button a second time. The front seat cushion
and seatback will return to the original starting
location.
NOTE:
To abort seat operation while seat is in motion,
push the Auto Advance ‘n Return button, or
push the front power seat button to stop the
seat movement. Pushing the Auto Advance ‘n
Return button again will return the front seat to
the original starting location.
The Auto Advance ‘n Return system includes
obstacle detection. When the system detects an
obstacle, the seat will stop, reverse direction,
and return to the previous location. A message
will be displayed in the instrument cluster indi-
cating that an obstacle has been detected.
If the front seat is already in a location that will
allow space for Stow ‘n Go of the second row
seat, the front seat will not move and a message
will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
If calibration of the front seat is lost, the seat will
automatically recalibrate when the Auto
Advance ‘n Return button is pushed. This may
result in the seat cushion moving forward and
downward, before moving to the location that
will allow space for the second row Stow ‘n Go
seat movement.
WARNING!
During power seat operation, personal injury or
cargo damage may occur. Ensure the front seat
is not occupied and the seat travel path is clear
when operating the power seat.
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
SECOND ROW STOW 'N GO
To stow the seat in the floor, move the front seat all
the way forward using the manual seat adjustment
bar. Move the seatback all the way forward using
the recliner handle located on the outboard side of
the cushion. Move the seat height to at least mid
position using the height adjuster handle in the
outboard side of the cushion.
1. To access the storage area, remove the floor
mat (if equipped) and place the lock rod in the
locked position.
Lock Rod
NOTE:
Push the lock rod inward for the locked
position.
Pull outward on the lock rod for the
unlocked position.
For information on storage bin function with
the seats rearward
Ú page 67.
2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat
to open the floor panel.
Floor Latch
3. Pull the floor panel and position it toward the
front seats while folding the top half down and
rest it against the front seats.
Push Panel Forward
4. Remove the plastic storage bin from the
storage area, and store in a safe location.
5. Fold the armrest upward and stow the seat by
grabbing the strap on the lower part of the
seatback, and guide the seat into the storage
area.
Pull Strap
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
6. Push down on the seatback to lock the seat
into the storage area.
Push To Lock
7. Close the floor by pulling the floor panel
backwards by the bottom corner edge of the
panel.
Extend Floor Panel
8. Push down on floor panel to lock into place.
Push To Lock
9. Readjust the front seat as needed, and
replace the floor mat (if equipped).
TO UNSTOW SECOND ROW SEATS
To unstow the seat from the floor, move the front
seat all the way forward using the manual seat
adjustment bar.
1. To access the storage area, remove the floor
mat (if equipped) and place the lock rod in the
locked position.
Lock Rod
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the
seat storage bin covers are not properly latched:
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must be latched and flat
to avoid damage from contact with the front
seat tracks, which have minimal clearance to
the cover.
Do not sit on the second row seat when it is in
the stowed position with the seatback upright
otherwise damage to the seat may occur.
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Push the lock rod inward for the locked
position.
Pull outward on the lock rod for the
unlocked position.
2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat
to open the floor panel.
Floor Latch
3. Pull the floor panel and position it toward the
front seats while folding the top half down and
rest it against the front seats.
Push Panel Forward
4. Pull the strap located on the seat and pull the
seat out of the storage area. Push the seat
rearward making sure that it locks into the
floor. Fold the seatback into the upright
position and pull the headrest up.
NOTE:
The seatback may be locked, if it is, it will be
necessary to use the recliner handle to unlock the
back before folding into the upright position.
Pull Strap
5. Replace the plastic storage bin into the
storage area.
6. To position the floor panel back into its original
state, grab the bottom corner and extend it
outward.
Extend Panel
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
7. Lay the floor panel flat and push down until it
clicks into position.
Push Down To Lock
8. Readjust the front seat as needed, and
replace the floor mat (if equipped).
POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with an eight-way
power seat for the driver. The power seat switches
are located on the outboard side of the seat. The
switches control the movement of the seat cushion
and the seatback.
Driver Power Seat Switches
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle
could be injured if seats are not properly
latched to their floor attachments. Always be
sure the seats are fully latched.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury
or death in a collision. Always make sure the
head restraints are in their upright positions
when the seat is to be occupied.
1 — Seat Switch
2 — Seatback Switch
3 — Lumbar Switch
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat's path.
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward by using the seat switch. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been
reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the rear of
seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of
the switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in
two directions. Pull upward or push downward on
the front of the seat switch, the front of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position has
been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward
or rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or
rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position is reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Power Lumbar Switch Location
The front driver’s seat may be equipped with a
four-way lumbar adjustment. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the
equipped power seat. Push the switch forward or
rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar
support. Push the switch upward or downward to
raise or lower the lumbar support.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat
positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on
where you have the driver seat positioned when
you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat's path.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
When the ignition is placed in the OFF position,
the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches
(60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is
greater than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to
its previously set position when the ignition is
cycled out of the OFF position.
When the ignition is placed in the OFF position,
the driver seat will move to a position 0.3 inches
(7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the driver
seat position is between 0.9 – 2.7 inches
(22.7 – 67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The
seat will return to its previously set position
when the ignition is cycled out of the OFF
position.
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled
when the driver seat position is less than
0.9 inches (22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop.
At this position, there is no benefit to the driver
by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be enabled or
disabled through the programmable features in
the instrument cluster display
Ú page 86.
HEATED SEATS
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons
are located in the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO or off heat settings.
The indicator lights in each switch indicate the
level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will
illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for off.
Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI
setting on.
Press the heated seat button a second time to
turn the LO setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time to turn
the heating elements off.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see
Ú page 18.
ADJUSTABLE ARMREST (FRONT SEATS)
— I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with adjustable
armrests on the front seats. The armrest can be
adjusted up or down.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical
condition must exercise care when using the
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over-
heated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To adjust the armrest height, push and hold the
button while moving the armrest to the desired
position. Release the button to lock the armrest
into place.
Adjustable Armrest
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of
injury by restricting head movement in the event of
a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted
so that the top of the head restraint is located
above the top of your ear.
Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped
with four-way head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button, located at the base of the
head restraint, and push downward. The front
head restraints are also adjustable forward and
rearward. To tilt forward, pull the top of the head
restraint toward the front of the vehicle to the
desired position. To adjust the head restraint
rearward, continue pulling forward on the top of
the head restraint to the furthest forward position
and the head restraint will return to the upright
position.
NOTE:
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go. Then, push the release button and the
adjustment button at the base of each post while
pulling the head restraint up. Seatback angle may
need to be adjusted to fully remove the head
restraint. To reinstall the head restraint, put the
head restraint posts into the holes and push
downward. Then, adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
Front Head Restraint
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Normal Position
Forward Adjustment
Head Restraints — Second Row Quad
Seats
The second row outboard head restraints, as well
as the removable 8th passenger seat (if equipped),
may have adjustable head restraints.
NOTE:
If equipped with Stow ‘n Go seating, the head
restraints are non-adjustable and non-removable.
Do not pull on non-adjustable head restraints
when folding the seat.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button, located at the base of the
head restraint, and push downward.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go. Then, push the release button and the
adjustment button at the base of each post while
pulling the head restraint up. Seatback angle may
need to be adjusted to fully remove the head
restraint. To reinstall the head restraint, put the
head restraint posts into the holes and push
downward. Then, adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
Head Restraints — Second Row Bench
The second row bench seat is equipped with
adjustable head restraints.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head restraints
in a location outside the occupant compart-
ment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the reinstallation instructions above
prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a
seat.
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button, located at the base of the
head restraint, and push downward.
Bench Seat Head Restraint
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go. Then, push the release button and the
adjustment button at the base of each post while
pulling the head restraint up. Seatback angle may
need to be adjusted to fully remove the head
restraint. To reinstall the head restraint, put the
head restraint posts into the holes and push
downward. Then, adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
NOTE:
For information on child restraint tethering, see
Ú page 174.
Head Restraints — Third Row
The outboard head restraints can be manually
folded forward for improved rearward visibility. Pull
the release strap to fold them forward.
Release Straps
NOTE:
The head restraints must be raised manually
when occupying the third row.
Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the
third row seats.
The head restraint in the center position can be
raised and lowered for tether routing or height
adjustment
Ú page 174.
NOTE:
To remove the center head restraint, raise it as far
as it can go. Then, push the release button and the
adjustment button at the base of each post while
pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes and push downward. Then, using the
adjustment button, adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head restraints
in a location outside the occupant compart-
ment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the reinstallation instructions above
prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a
seat.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
Adjustment Button
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice
Commands and tips you need to know to control
your system.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at
any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands.
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate /deactivate
your Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of noise
that may impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, first push
the VR button, wait until after the beep, then say
your Voice Command. You can also say the
vehicle “Wake Up” word and state your
command.
A passenger can press the VR button shortcut
on the radio status bar to also issue a
command.
You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a
Voice Command or saying the vehicle’s “Wake
Up” word and saying a command from the
current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the reinstallation instructions above prior
to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
1 — Push To Answer An Incoming Phone Call
2 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Start A
Phone Call, Begin Radio, Media, And Climate
Functions, Or Send Or Receive A Text
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2021 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar
Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC.
Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM®
and all related marks and logos are trademarks of
SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Ú page 304.
For Uconnect system support, call
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
or visit
DriveUconnect.com (US) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is used to allow the driver
to adjust up, down and left, right. The mirror should
be adjusted to center on the view through the rear
window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should
be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
the windshield).
Manual Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the
feature on or off by pushing the button at the base
of the mirror (if equipped). The backlighting of the
button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming
feature is activated.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is not equipped with an on/off
button on the mirror, the mirror will default to on
and may be able to be turned on/off through the
Uconnect system. If the Uconnect system does
not support the on/off control, the automatic
dimming mirror is defaulted to on, and will
remain on at all times when the ambient and
environmental lighting conditions support its
function.
This feature is disabled when the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
Automatic Dimming Mirror On/Off Button (If Equipped)
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS —
I
F EQUIPPED
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down
one of the visors and lift the cover.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto
the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth
and wipe the mirror clean.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
Illuminated Mirror
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center
of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the
optimal view.
CONVERSATION MIRROR
Located in the overhead console there is a
conversation mirror to view all the passengers in
the vehicle. Push the panel to release the drop
down mirror. Raise the mirror and push to latch it
back in the stowed position.
Conversation Mirror
POWER MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The power mirror controls are located on the
driver-side door trim panel.
Power Mirror Controls
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select
buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To
adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right)
to select the mirror that you want to adjust.
NOTE:
A light in the selected button will illuminate indi-
cating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the
four arrows for the direction that you want the
mirror to move.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on side
convex mirrors could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
1 — Left Mirror Select
2 — Mirror Control Switch
3 — Right Mirror Select
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
OUTSIDE MIRRORS FOLDING FEATURE
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved
either forward or rearward to resist damage. The
hinges have three detent positions:
Full forward position
Full rearward position
Normal position
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
HomeLink® replaces up to
three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motor-
ized gates, lighting, or home
security systems. The HomeLink® unit is
powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
overhead console or sunvisor designate the
three different HomeLink® channels.
To operate HomeLink®, push and release any
of the programmed HomeLink® buttons. These
buttons will activate the devices they are
programmed to with each press of the corre-
sponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located above
the center button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security
system is active
Ú page 304.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the Radio Frequency (RF) signal, it
is recommended that a new battery be placed in
the hand-held transmitter of the device that is
being programmed to the HomeLink® system.
Make sure your hand-held transmitter is
programmed to activate the device you are trying
to program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
garage before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels
of your HomeLink® before you use it for the first
time.
If you require assistance, please call toll-free
1-800-355-3515 or visit
HomeLink.com .
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition into the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until
the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed
when programming HomeLink® for the first time.
Do not erase channels when programming addi-
tional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether
the device has a rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a
good indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically,
devices manufactured after 1995 have rolling
codes. A device with a rolling code will also have a
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the
antenna is attached to the device. The button may
not be immediately visible when looking at the
device. The name and color of the button may vary
slightly by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button
you normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not
have a rolling code. These devices will also not
have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to
activate your garage door opener motor, follow the
steps below:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels
when programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program, while
keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold the
garage door opener transmitter button you are
trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink®
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly.
Once this happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor
is plugged in before moving on to the rolling
code/non-rolling code final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling
code final step 2, after completing rolling code
final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button. This can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the
garage door opener motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button three times
(holding the button for two seconds each
time). If the garage door opener motor
operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor
does not operate, repeat the final steps for the
rolling code procedure.
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the HomeLink® indicator
light. If the HomeLink® indicator light stays
on constantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor
does not operate, repeat the steps from the
beginning.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a
miscellaneous device follows the same procedure
as programming to a garage door opener
Ú page 51. Be sure to determine if the device has
a rolling code, or non-rolling code before beginning
the programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require trans-
mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission, which may not be long
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some
U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the
same manner. The procedure may need to be
performed multiple times to successfully pair the
device to your HomeLink® buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has
been previously trained, without erasing all the
channels, follow the procedure below. Be sure to
determine whether the new device you want to
program the HomeLink® button to has a rolling
code, or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
without starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button
until the HomeLink® indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A
Garage Door Opener” and follow all remaining
steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United
States that require the transmitter signals to
“time-out” after several seconds of transmission:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission, which may not be
long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal
during programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out
in the same manner.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the universal
transmitter. Do not program the transmitter if
people or pets are in the path of the door or
gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or
confined area while programming the trans-
mitter. Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous
when inhaled and can cause you and others to
be severely injured or killed.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating of
the garage door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™,
place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. Make
sure while programming HomeLink® with the
engine on that your vehicle is outside of your
garage, or that the garage door remains open at all
times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button
you wish to program while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink®
button while you push and release (cycle) your
hand-held transmitter every two seconds until
HomeLink® has successfully accepted the
frequency signal. The indicator light will flash
slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change
flash rates. When it changes, it is
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or
longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pushed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each
remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device
for programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button
until the indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming”
Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or
turn in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons
for 20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note
that all channels will be erased. Individual
channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled
when the Vehicle Security system is active.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming
HomeLink®, here are some of the most common
solutions:
Replace the battery in the garage door opener
hand-held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the garage door
opener to complete the training for a rolling
code.
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If you have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the
Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or
assistance.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of
the steering column. The multifunction lever
controls the turn signals, headlight high/low
beams, and flash-to-pass functions.
Multifunction Lever
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. The switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights,
instrument panel lights, interior lights, and the fog
lights.
Headlight Switch
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the
garage while programming the transceiver.
Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the universal
transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if
people, pets or other objects are in the path of
the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with
a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by Federal safety
standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do
not use a garage door opener without these
safety features.
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Fog Light Control
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a head-
light switch without the OFF position. In order to
turn the exterior lights off, the headlight switch
must be rotated to AUTO position.
From the O (off) position, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise to the first detent for parking
lights and instrument panel lights operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent
for headlights, parking lights and instrument panel
operation.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise from the parking light and
instrument panel light position to the first detent to
turn on the headlights also. Rotate to the second
detent, AUTO position, to turn on automatic head-
lights, parking lights, and instrument panel lights.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The headlights or LED light bars on your vehicle will
illuminate when the engine is started. This
provides a constant lights on condition until the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. If the parking
brake is applied, the Daytime Running Lights
(DRLs) will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime
Running Lights will automatically deactivate
when the front fog lights are turned on.
If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased, the Daytime Running
Lights can be turned on and off using the Ucon-
nect system
Ú page 141.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights
may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side
of the vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on
that side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when
the hazard warning lights are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beams.
Pulling the multifunction lever back will turn the
low beams on.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights
by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you.
This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on,
and remain on, until the lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns your headlights on
or off based on ambient light levels. To turn the
system on, turn the headlight switch to the extreme
clockwise position aligning the indicator with the
AUTO on the headlight switch. When the system is
on, the Headlight Time Delay feature is also on.
This means your headlights will stay on for up to 90
seconds after the ignition is placed in the OFF
position. To turn the automatic system off, move
the headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the Automatic mode.
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Fog Light Control
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEADLIGHT TIME DELAY — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides the safety of headlight
illumination for up to 90 seconds after exiting your
vehicle.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in
the OFF position while the headlights are still on.
The 90 second delay interval begins when
headlight switch is turned off. If the headlights or
parking lights are turned back on or the ignition is
placed in the ON position, the delay will be
cancelled.
When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose
to have the headlights remain on for 30, 60, or
90 seconds or not remain on. You can change the
timer setting through the Uconnect system
Ú page 141.
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition,
they will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
The headlights must be turned off within
45 seconds of placing the ignition in the OFF
position to activate this feature.
LIGHTS -ON REMINDER
If the headlights or the parking lights are left on
after the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the
vehicle will chime when the driver's door is opened.
FRONT FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the
headlight switch control knob. Pushing the
headlight switch control knob a second time will
turn the front fog lights off.
Fog Light Switch
Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to
activate the turn signals. The arrows on each side
of the instrument cluster flash to show proper
operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective
outside light bulb.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Turn Signal Warning
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled for about 1 mile (1.6 km) with a turn
signal on, a chime will sound and a message will
display in the cluster to alert the driver.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal (right or left) will flash three times then
automatically turn off.
BATTERY PROTECTION
This feature provides battery protection to avoid
wearing down the battery if the headlights or
parking lights are left on for extended periods of
time when the ignition is in the OFF position. After
eight minutes of the ignition being in the OFF
position and the headlight switch in any position
other than OFF or AUTO, the lights will turn off
automatically until the next cycle of the ignition or
headlight switch.
The battery protection feature will be disabled if
the ignition is placed in any position other than OFF
during the eight minute delay.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
INTERIOR COURTESY LIGHTS
The courtesy light switches are used to turn the
courtesy lights on/off.
Courtesy Light Switches
To operate the courtesy lights, push either the
driver or passenger light switch.
NOTE:
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the
interior lights are turned off. This will prevent the
battery from discharging once the doors are
closed.
If a light is left on, it will automatically be turned
off approximately 10 minutes after the ignition
is in the OFF position.
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights —
If Equipped
Located above the rear passengers are courtesy/
reading lights. The lights turn on when a front door,
a sliding door or the liftgate is opened. If your
vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) the lights will also turn on when the unlock
button on the key fob is pushed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights.
Push the lens to turn these lights on while inside
the vehicle. Push the lens a second time to turn
each light off.
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer controls are part of the headlight
switch, and are located on the driver’s side of the
instrument panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating
the right dimmer control upward will increase the
brightness of the instrument cluster lights.
Rotating the left dimmer control will adjust the
interior light levels of the ambient lighting on the
instrument panel and doors.
Dimmer Controls
Dimmer Controls (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
At the top detent of the instrument panel dimmer
(parade mode), all the interior lights will illuminate.
At the bottom most setting (extreme bottom)
interior lights are turned off (dome off), and the
cluster, radio and instrument lighting go to their
lowest dimmable setting.
Parade Mode
(Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control
upward to the first detent. This feature brightens
all text displays such as the odometer, instrument
cluster display, and radio when the position lights
or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located
on the right side of the steering column. The front
wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located
on the end of the lever.
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch
within the wiper lever. Rotate the switch at the end
of the lever upward, to the first detent past the
intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation. Rotate the switch at the end of the lever
upward to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation. To turn the
windshield wipers off, rotate the switch within the
lever all the way down to OFF.
1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
Washer And Wiper Controls
NOTE:
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned
off and the blades cannot return to the off position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wipers
Use the intermittent wiper when weather
conditions make a single wiping cycle with a
variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate
the switch at the end of the wiper lever to the first
detent position, and then turn the switch at the end
of the lever to select the desired delay interval.
There are four delay settings, which allow you to
regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one
cycle every second to a maximum of approximately
36 seconds between cycles. The delay intervals
will double in duration when the vehicle speed is
10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward
you and hold. If the lever is pulled while on the
intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and
operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is
released, and then resume the intermittent
interval previously selected. If the lever is pulled
while the wipers are in the off position, the wipers
will operate several cycles, then turn off.
Mist
Push the lever upward to the MIST position and
release for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on
the windshield. The wash function must be used in
order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement,
see
Ú page 253.
1 — Pull For Front Washer
2 — Rotate For Rear Wiper Operation
3 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
4 — Push Forward For Rear Washer
5 — Push Up For Mist
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden
icing of the windshield during freezing weather,
warm the windshield with the defroster before
and during windshield washer use.
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WIPER AND WASHER
The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a
switch, located at the middle of the lever.
Rotate the center portion of the lever
upward to the first detent for intermittent
operation and to the second detent for
continuous rear wiper operation.
Rear Window Washer Operation
Pushing the windshield wiper lever
forward activates the rear window
washer. If the lever is pushed while on
the intermittent setting, the wipers will
turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after
the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected. If the
lever is pushed while the wipers are in the off
position, the wipers will operate several wipe
cycles, then turn off.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 5 With 7–inch Display
Manual Temperature Controls
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button to
change the current setting. The indicator
illuminates when MAX A/C is on.
Performing this function again will cause
the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode
and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C setting is only available on the touch-
screen.
A/C Button
Press and release the A/C button to
change the current setting. The indicator
illuminates when A/C is on.
NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in
Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower
speed if needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C
condenser (located in front of the radiator), for
an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a
gentle water spray from the front of the radiator
and through the condenser.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change
the system between recirculation mode
and outside air mode. The Recirculation
indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate
when the Recirculation button is pressed.
Recirculation can be used when outside conditions
such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are
present. Recirculation can be used in all modes
except for Defrost. Recirculation may be
unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed
out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on
the inside of the windshield. The A/C (Air
Conditioning) can be deselected manually without
disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous
use of the Recirculation mode may make the
inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
Recirculation mode may automatically adjust to
optimize customer experience for warming,
cooling, dehumidification, etc.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls (if
equipped), the Recirculation mode is not allowed
in Defrost mode to improve window clearing
operation. Recirculation is disabled automatically
if this mode is selected. Attempting to use
Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED in
the control button to blink, and then turn off.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost
button to change the current airflow
setting to Defrost mode. The indicator
illuminates when this feature is on. Air
comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level may increase. Use
Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings
for best windshield and side window defrosting
and defogging.
Performing this function will cause the Automatic
Temperature Control (ATC) to switch into manual
mode. If the Front Defrost mode is turned off the
climate system will return the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost
Control button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). An indicator will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear
window defroster automatically turns off after
15 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners
on the interior surface of the window. Use a
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can
be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Temperature Control
These buttons provide the driver and passenger
with independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue arrow
button on the touchscreen for cooler
temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature
on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated
when this feature is enabled. SYNC is
used to synchronize the front and rear passenger
temperature settings with the driver temperature
setting. Changing the front or rear passenger
temperature setting while in SYNC will
automatically exit this feature. Pressing SYNC on
the touchscreen while in the Front Climate screen
synchronizes the driver and passenger
temperatures only. In order to SYNC rear
temperature to driver temperature, the
touchscreen must be on the Rear Climate screen.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the Climate
Control system. There are seven blower
speeds available.
The speeds can be selected using either the
blower control knob on the faceplate or the
buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you
turn the blower control knob clockwise from the
lowest blower setting. The blower speed
decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to
reduce the blower setting and the large blower
icon to increase the blower setting. Blower
speed can also be selected by pressing the
blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
The airflow distribution mode can be
adjusted so air comes from the
instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
defrost outlets and demist outlets.
Faceplate: Push the button in the center of the
knob to change the airflow distribution mode.
Touchscreen: Select Mode by pressing one of the
Mode Buttons on the touchscreen.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these outlets
can be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. The air vanes of the center
outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister
outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
and side window demister outlets. This
setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the
windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the
Climate Control ON/OFF.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls
From The Front MTC Display/Touchscreen
The Three-Zone Manual Temperature Control
(MTC) system allows for adjustment of the rear
climate controls from the front MTC display/
touchscreen.
To change the rear system settings:
Press the "Rear Climate" button on the touch-
screen to display the rear climate controls. The
control functions now operate the rear system.
Press the "Front Climate" button on the touch-
screen to return to the front climate controls.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL BUTTON
Press and release this button to access
the rear climate controls. The indicator
will illuminate when the rear climate
controls are on.
REAR LOCK BUTTON
Press and release this button to lock out
the rear manual temperature controls
from adjusting the rear temperature and
blower settings.
FRONT CLIMATE BUTTON
Press and release this button to change
the display on the Uconnect system back
to the Front Climate Controls.
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL
These buttons provide the rear passengers with
independent temperature control.
Push the up arrow button on the
touchscreen to increase the
temperature.
Push the down arrow button on the
touchscreen to decrease the
temperature.
NOTE:
When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s
temperature moves up and down with the driver’s
temperature.
SYNC BUTTON
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature
on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated
when this feature is enabled. SYNC is
used to synchronize the front and rear passenger
temperature settings with the driver temperature
setting. Changing the front or rear passenger
temperature setting while in SYNC exits this
feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touch-
screen.
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
BLOWER CONTROL
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the Climate
Control system. There are seven blower
speeds available. Adjusting the blower
causes automatic mode to switch to manual
operation. The speeds can be selected using the
buttons on the touchscreen.
PANEL MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to
change the air distribution mode to Panel
Mode. In Panel Mode, air comes from the
outlets in the headliner. Each of these
outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to
one side will shut off the airflow.
BI-LEVEL MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to
change the air distribution mode to
Bi-Level Mode. In Bi-Level Mode, air
comes from the headliner outlets and
floor outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level Mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
FLOOR MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to
change the air distribution mode to Floor
Mode. In Floor Mode, air comes from the
floor outlets.
REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE CONTROL OFF
BUTTON
Press and release this button to turn the
Rear Climate Controls off.
Rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC)
The rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC)
system has floor air outlets at the rear right side of
the third row seats and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system
provides heated air through the floor outlets or
cool, dehumidified air through the headliner
outlets.
The rear system temperature control buttons are
located on the headliner on the passenger side of
the vehicle.
Rear Manual Climate Controls
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic
Temperature Control system through an intake
grille, located in the floor under the passengers’
seats. Do not block or place objects directly in
front of the inlet grille or heater outlets. The
electrical system could overload causing
damage to the blower motor.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Push the up arrow button to raise the
temperature. The rear temperature
settings are displayed in control head.
Push the down arrow button to lower the
temperature. The rear temperature
settings are displayed in control head.
REAR BLOWER CONTROL
The rear blower control can be manually
set to off, or any fixed blower speed by
pushing the blower control buttons. This
allows the rear seat occupants to control
the volume of air circulated in the rear of the
vehicle. The larger of the two icons increases
blower speed, whereas the smaller of the two icons
decreases the blower speed.
REAR MODE CONTROL
Push this button on the Rear Climate
Controls to change the air distribution
mode for the rear passengers.
PANEL MODE
Air comes from the outlets in the
headliner. Each of these outlets can be
individually adjusted to direct the flow of
air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to
one side will shut off the airflow.
BI-LEVEL MODE
Air comes from both the headliner outlets
and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode
is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
FLOOR MODE
Air comes from the floor outlets.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL/BLOWER OFF
To manually set the rear blower controls
to off, press the Rear Climate Control/
Blower Off button.
OPERATING TIPS
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with
a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper
corrosion protection and to protect against engine
overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling
system is functioning properly and the proper
amount, type, and concentration of coolant is
used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during
Winter months is not recommended, because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control
system when the vehicle is being stored for an
extended period of time, see
Ú page 292.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild,
rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase
the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods,
as fogging may occur.
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of
the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as
leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may
reduce airflow, and if they enter the air distribution
box, they could plug the water drains. In Winter
months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to
service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced
when needed.
Operating Tips Chart
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release
handle.
Release Handle
Front Door Storage
Both interior front door panels have multiple
pockets for storage.
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode),
(A/C) on, and blower
on high. Roll down the
windows for a minute
to flush out the hot air.
Adjust the controls as
needed to achieve
comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and
set the mode control to
(Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny
Operate in (Bi-Level
Mode.
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode) and
turn (A/C) on to
keep windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode). If
windshield fogging
starts to occur, move
the control to (Mix
Mode).
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed,
burning the occupants. Be careful when closing
the doors to avoid injury.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Overhead Sunglass Storage
At the front of the overhead console, a
compartment is provided for the storage of one
pair of sunglasses.
From the closed position, push the indentation to
open the compartment.
Overhead Sunglass Door Latch
The door will slowly rotate to the full open position.
Instrument Panel Drawer
There is a storage drawer located in the lower
center of the instrument panel. It can be released
by pushing the access button above it. The drawer
is actuator assisted once the access button is
pushed. Pull drawer outward to the fully open
position.
Drawer Access Button
Front Seatback Storage — If Equipped
The front seatbacks have a storage pocket on
some models.
Front Seatback Storage
Second Row Floor Storage Bins
There are removable storage bins (if equipped)
located in the areas below the load floor, located in
front of the second row seats.
In Floor Storage Bin
CAUTION!
The storage drawer must be closed while driving.
If left open during a collision, additional damage
may occur to property or the drawer mechanism.
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
1. To access the storage bins with front seats in
the rearward position, place the lock rod in
the unlocked position so the load floor can
fold upwards towards the seatback.
Lock Rod
NOTE:
Push the lock rod inward for the locked
position.
Pull outward on the lock rod for the
unlocked position.
2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat
to open the floor panel.
Floor Latch
STORAGE BIN SAFETY WARNING
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent
personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the
seat storage bin covers are not properly latched.
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.
Do not operate the storage bin covers while
the vehicle is in motion.
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lay flat and be
latched to avoid damage from contact with the
front seat tracks, which have minimal clearance
to the cover. If the storage bin cover is left in the
open position, front seat adjustment may
damage the cover.
WARNING!
Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
Do not allow children to have access to the
second row seat storage bins. Once in the
storage bin, young children may not be able to
escape. If trapped in the storage bin, children
can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
In a collision, serious injury could result if the
seat storage bin covers are not properly
latched.
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open. Keep the storage bin covers
closed and latched while the vehicle is in
motion.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
SEAT STORAGE BIN COVER EMERGENCY
RELEASE LEVER
As a security measure, the Seat Storage Bin Cover
has an Emergency Release Lever built into the
latching mechanism.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
NOTE:
In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be
opened from inside of the bin by pushing on the
glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the storage bin
cover latching mechanism.
SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED
Sun screens are available for second row seating
windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels,
and the tops of the windows are equipped with
hooks that the sun screens attach to when pulled
out.
Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen.
Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is
near the top of the window.
Once the screen is completely to the top of the
window, extend the top bar of the sun screen over
the two hooks attached to the top of the window.
Sun Screen Extended
To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward
to disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back
into the base sill.
USB/AUX C ONTROL
There are numerous USB ports located throughout
the vehicle that allow an external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port. There are four, fully
functional USB ports: Two Mini-USBs (Type C) and
two Standard USBs (Type A). There is also an AUX
port located between the USB ports.
Do not operate the storage bin covers while
the vehicle is in motion.
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lay flat and be
latched to avoid damage from contact with the
front seat tracks, which have minimal clearance
to the cover. If the storage bin cover is left in the
open position, front seat adjustment may
damage the cover.
WARNING!
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Two devices can be plugged in at the same time,
and both ports will provide charging capabilities.
Only one port can transfer data to the system at a
time. A pop-up will appear and allow you to select
the device transferring data.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A
USB port and another device is plugged into the
Type C USB port, a message will appear and allow
you to select which device to use.
Front Center Stack AUX Jack And USB Ports
There are multiple USB “Charge Only” ports in this
vehicle.
On the back of the front row seats (if equipped).
Above the rear cup holder in the third row seats
(if equipped).
Rear Seat USB Charging Port
3rd Row USB Charging Port
NOTE:
The USB “Charge Only” ports will recharge battery
operated USB devices when connected.
Different scenarios are listed below when a
non-phone device is plugged into the smaller and
larger USB ports, and when a phone device is
plugged into the smaller and larger USB ports:
“A new device is now connected. Previous
connection was lost”.
“(Phone Name) now connected. Previous
connection was lost”.
“Another device is in use through the same USB
port. Please disconnect the first device to use
the second device”.
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may
cause the connection to a previous device to be
lost.
POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (15 Amp)
power outlets, and 5 Volt (2.5 Amp) USB ports, that
can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical
accessories.
1 — Type C And Type A USB Ports 1
2 — Type C And Type A USB Ports 2
3 — AUX Port
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
The power outlets can be labeled with either a
“key” or a “battery” symbol to indicate how the
outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled with a
“key” are powered when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN or ACC position, while the outlets labeled
with a “battery” are connected directly to the
battery and powered at all times.
NOTE:
All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a front power
outlet located either on the center stack, or at the
bottom of the instrument panel near the storage
tray.
12 Volt Front Power Outlet (Near Storage Tray) -
If Equipped
12 Volt Front Power Outlet (On Center Stack) -
If Equipped
In addition to the front power outlets, there is also
a power outlet located in the rear cargo area.
The rear power outlet is located in the right rear
cargo area.
Rear Power Outlet
NOTE:
The instrument panel power outlet can be changed
to “battery” (powered at all times) by switching the
power outlet fuse in the Power Distribution Center
panel from fuse location F95A to F95B.
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow
the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
The window switches on the driver’s door trim
panel control all of the door windows.
Driver’s Power Window Controls
The driver may lock out the rear power windows by
pushing the bar control just below the power
window controls.
Power Window Lockout Switch
The window switches will operate only when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and
during power accessory delay.
1 — F95A (Ignition)/F95B (Battery) Front Power
Outlet 10A (If Equipped)
2 — F85 Cigar Lighter 20A
3 — F60 RR Cargo Power Outlet 20A
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery, even when
not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventu-
ally, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
degrade the battery even more quickly. Only
use these intermittently and with greater
caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories,
or long periods of the vehicle not being started
(with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle
must be driven a sufficient length of time to
allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's
battery.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
NOTE:
Power Window controls will also remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition has been
placed in the OFF position, depending upon the
accessory delay setting. Opening a front door will
cancel this feature.
There is a single control on the front passenger’s
door trim panel which operates the passenger door
window and a set of controls that lock and unlock
all doors. The controls will operate only when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and
during power accessory delay.
Sliding Side Door Power Window Control —
If Equipped
Second row passengers may open and close the
sliding door window by a single control on the door
handle assembly.
The controls will operate only when the ignition
switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during
power accessory delay.
NOTE:
The controls will not operate if the driver has acti-
vated the Power Window Lockout.
Sliding Door Power Window Control (Left Side Shown)
NOTE:
The sliding door windows do not fully open,
stopping several inches above the window sill.
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and front passenger door power window
switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the
window switch past the first detent, release, and
the window will go down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the
switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
switch briefly and release it when you want the
window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go
back down. Remove the obstacle and use the
window switch again to close the window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly
during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch
lightly and hold to close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers
and all objects from the window path before
closing.
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
RESET AUTO UP
To reactivate the Auto Up feature, perform the
following steps after vehicle power is restored:
1. Pull the window control up to close the
window completely and continue to hold the
control up for an additional two seconds after
the window is closed.
2. Push the window control down firmly to the
second detent to open the window completely
and continue to hold the control down for an
additional two seconds after the window is
fully open.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception
of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound
in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting
with the windows down, or the sunroof (if
equipped) in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be
minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting
occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
HOOD
OPENING
The hood release lever (to open the primary latch)
and safety latch (to open the secondary latch)
must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the
driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
2. Move to the outside of the front of the vehicle.
3. Push the safety latch release lever toward the
passenger side of the vehicle. The safety latch
is located behind the center front edge of the
hood.
Safety Latch Release Lever Location
4. Remove the support rod from the locking tab
and insert it into the seat located on the
underside of the hood.
NOTE:
Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper
arms are not in motion and not in the lifted
position.
While lifting the hood, use both hands.
Vehicle must be at a stop and the transmission
must be in PARK.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
CLOSING
1. Hold up the hood with one hand and with the
other hand remove the support rod from its
seat and reinsert it into the locking tab.
2. Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) from the engine compartment and
drop it. Make sure that the hood is completely
closed.
LIFTGATE
TO UNLOCK /OPEN THE LIFTGATE
The liftgate may be released in several ways:
Key fob
Outside handle
Button on overhead console
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within
five seconds to release the liftgate.
The key fob and the overhead console button will
release the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The
outside handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry,
pulling the outside handle will unlock and release
the liftgate, with a valid Passive Entry key fob
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate.
Electronic Liftgate
NOTE:
When you push the Passive Entry button, either
only the liftgate will unlock, or all the doors and the
liftgate will unlock, depending on the selected
setting in the Uconnect system
Ú page 141.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to close.
Make sure hood is fully closed for both latches.
Never drive vehicle unless hood is fully closed,
with both latches engaged.
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release Handle
2 — Passive Entry Lock Button
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TO LOCK/CLOSE THE LIFTGATE
To manually close the liftgate, grab the liftgate
closing handle and pull in a downward motion.
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry lock
button located to the right of the outside handle to
lock the vehicle.
POWER LIFTGATE — IF EQUIPPED
The power liftgate may be opened or closed in
several ways:
Overhead console liftgate button
Key fob
Outside handle (opens liftgate only)
Rear interior power liftgate switch on the upper
left trim (when liftgate is open)
Using the above ways to open or close the liftgate:
When the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate will
open
When the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate will
close
When the liftgate is moving, the liftgate will
reverse
Push the Power Liftgate button on the overhead
console to open or close the liftgate.
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within
five seconds to open or close the liftgate.
Overhead Console Power Switches
The key fob and the overhead console button will
operate the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The
outside handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry,
pressing the touch pad on the outside handle will
unlock and open the liftgate, with a valid Passive
Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate
handle.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured by
these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when
you are operating the vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed,
and the climate control blower switch is set at
high speed. Do not use the recirculation
mode.
1 — Liftgate
2 — Left Sliding Door
3 — Sliding Door Power Off
4 — Right Sliding Door
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
NOTE:
Tones are sounded and the turn signals are
flashed with liftgate movements. These alerts can
be turned on or off in Uconnect Settings
Ú page 141.
To Close The Liftgate
The liftgate can also be closed using the Rear
Interior Power Liftgate button (if equipped), located
in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening.
Rear Interior Power Liftgate Switch
To Lock The Vehicle
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Passive Entry
lock button located to the right of the outside
handle will lock the vehicle.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Area Storage
When the third row seats are not in the stowed
position, there is a large area for cargo storage.
Rear Cargo Area
NOTE:
With all rear seats stowed or removed, 4 x 8 ft
(1.2 x 2.4 m) sheets of building material will fit on
the vehicle floor with the liftgate closed. The front
seats must be moved slightly forward of the
rearmost position.
STOW ‘N PLACE ROOF RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack.
The load must not exceed 150 lb (68 kg), and
should be uniformly distributed over the luggage
rack crossbars.
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed
within the roof rack side rails. Crossbars should
always be used whenever cargo is placed on the
roof rack. Check the straps frequently to be sure
that the load remains securely attached.
Roof Rack
1 — Side Rail
2 — Crossbar
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The Stow ‘N Place roof rack does not increase the
total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure
the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that
on the external rack does not exceed the maximum
vehicle load capacity.
DEPLOYING THE CROSSBARS
1. To deploy the crossbars, completely loosen
the thumb screws at both ends of the
crossbar and lift the crossbar from its stowed
position in the side rail. Repeat with crossbar
on the opposite side.
Thumb Screw
NOTE:
The thumb screws cannot be fully removed.
Removing Crossbars
2. Bend the crossbar supports at each end,
taking care to keep hand clear of pivoting joint.
Slide the thumb screw down.
Bending Pivot
3. Position the crossbars across the roof making
sure the letters on the crossbars align with the
matching letters on the side rail.
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the
crossbars to prevent damage to the vehicle.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
Positioning Crossbars
4. Once the crossbar is in place, tighten both
thumb screws completely.
Installing Crossbars
5. Deploy and tighten the second crossbar to
complete the deployment of the crossbars.
NOTE:
The crossbars are not identical and have fixed
deployment positions. Rear crossbar can be
deployed in two different positions.
STOWING THE CROSSBARS
1. Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen
the thumb screws at both ends. Lift the
crossbar away from the matching letter to
remove it from the deployed position. Repeat
with the other crossbar.
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Starting with the one crossbar, bend up the
pivot supports at each end.
Crossbar Pivot
3. Then, position the crossbar along the correct
side rail. Make sure the letters on the crossbar
align with the matching letters on the side rail.
Stowing Crossbars
4. The crossbar will nest fully within the side rail.
Crossbar To Side Rail
5. Once the driver’s side crossbar is in place,
tighten the thumb screws completely.
Tightening Crossbar
6. Repeat the procedure to stow the second
crossbar on the opposite side.
Stowed Crossbars
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the
crossbars to prevent damage to the vehicle.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
(Continued)
NOTE:
To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in
the side rails when they are not in use.
If any metallic object is placed over the satellite
radio antenna (if equipped), you may experience
interruption of satellite radio reception.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving
your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off
the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting
in personal injury or property damage. Follow
the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on
your roof rack.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle,
DO NOT carry any loads on the roof rack
without the crossbars deployed. The load
should be secured and placed on top of the
crossbars, not directly on the roof. If it is
necessary to place the load on the roof, place
a blanket or other protective layer between
the load and the roof surface.
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle,
do not exceed the maximum roof rack load
capacity of 150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute
heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure
the load appropriately.
Load should always be secured to cross bars
first, with tie down loops used as additional
securing points if needed. Tie loops are
intended as supplementary tie down points
only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms with
the tie loops. Check the straps and thumb
wheels frequently to be sure that the load
remains securely attached.
Long loads that extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads
with large frontal area should be secured to
both the front and rear of the vehicle.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
carefully when carrying large or heavy loads
on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural
causes or nearby truck traffic, can add sudden
upward lift to a load. This is especially true on
large flat loads and may result in damage to
the cargo or your vehicle.
CAUTION!
2
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 83
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, this
display shows the instrument cluster
display messages
Ú page 86.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within the
normal range indicates that the engine
cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge can indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather or up
mountain grades. It should not be allowed
to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
5. Fuel Gauge
The gauge shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the
fuel door is located.
NOTE:
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate for a
bulb check when the ignition is first cycled.
WARNING!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reaches “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off
until the gauge drops back into the normal range
and is no longer red. If the gauge remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats
Ú page 258.
3
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 85
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, this
display shows the instrument cluster
display messages
Ú page 86.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within the
normal range indicates that the engine
cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge can indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather or up
mountain grades. It should not be allowed
to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
5. Fuel Gauge
The gauge shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the
fuel door is located.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the
driver. With the ignition in the OFF position (and the
key removed, for vehicles with mechanical key),
opening/closing of a door will activate the display
for viewing, and display the total miles or
kilometers in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important
information about your vehicle’s systems and
features. Using a driver interactive display located
on the instrument panel, your instrument cluster
display can show you how systems are working and
give you warnings when they are not. The steering
wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through
and enter the main menus and submenus. You can
access the specific information you want and
make selections and adjustments.
WARNING!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reaches “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off
until the gauge drops back into the normal range
and is no longer red. If the gauge remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats
Ú page 258.
3
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
L
OCATION AND CONTROLS
The vehicle’s instrument cluster is equipped with
an instrument cluster display (base or premium
cluster), which offers useful information to the
driver.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
The instrument cluster display controls allows the
driver to select information by pushing the
directional buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
Back / Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to
scroll upward through the Main Menu items.
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to
scroll downward through the Main Menu items.
OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the infor-
mation screens or submenu screens of a Main
Menu item. Push and hold the OK button for two
seconds to reset displayed/selected features
that can be reset.
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 87
The instrument cluster display (base/premium
cluster) features a driver interactive display that is
located in the center of the instrument cluster, and
may include the following menu/submenu items:
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Fuel Economy
Trip (Trip A / Trip B)
Stop / Start — If Equipped
Audio
Messages
Screen Setup
OIL LIFE RESET
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Required” message will display for approxi-
mately five seconds after a single chime has
sounded, to indicate it is time to change the
engine oil. The engine oil change indicator
system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, depen-
dent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time the ignition is cycled to the
ON/RUN position.
To reset the oil change indicator after
performing the scheduled maintenance, refer to
the following procedure.
NOTE:
This procedure should only be performed after
scheduled maintenance is completed. Resetting
oil life other than when associated with a
scheduled maintenance may result in damage due
to not properly maintaining the engine oil.
Oil Life Reset
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start
the vehicle.)
2. Push the OK button to enter the instrument
cluster display menu screen.
3. Push and release the down arrow button to
access the ”Vehicle Info” menu screen.
4. Push the left arrow button or right arrow
button to access the “Oil Life” submenu.
5. Hold the OK button to reset the “Oil Life” to
100%.
6. Push the up arrow button to exit the
instrument cluster display menu screen.
Secondary Method For Oil Life Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start
the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three
times within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
KEYSENSE CLUSTER MESSAGES —
I
F EQUIPPED
When the KeySense key is in use there will be:
Continuous, dedicated telltale
Unique Display Splash Screen
With KeySense in use there will be multiple
associated messages shown in the following table:
3
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MENU
I
TEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to view
the main menu items for several features. Use the
up and down arrow buttons to scroll through
the driver interactive display menu options until
the desired menu is reached
Ú page 86.
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display menu items display
in the center of the instrument cluster. Menu items
may vary depending on your vehicle features.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until Speedometer is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
OK button to toggle between MPH and km/h.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until Vehicle Info is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push the left or
right arrow button to scroll through the following
information submenus:
Setting Instrument Cluster Display Message
None – With vehicle ignition ON “KeySense in use. Max vehicle speed set to xx MPH/or km/h”
Max Vehicle Speed
“Max speed reached. KeySense in use” supported by a chime
“Approaching max speed xx MPH/km/h” supported by a chime
Start Up Fuel Alert message “Range to empty xxx miles or km”
Early Low Fuel Alert Message “Fuel Low”
ParkSense “Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use”
Blind Spot “Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use”
Forward Collision Warning “Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use”
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 89
Tire Pressure
If tire pressure is OK for all tires, a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner
of the ICON.
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire
To XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON, and the
tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON with
the pressure value of the low tire displayed in a
different color than the other tire pressure value.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service,
“Service Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot
be reset
Ú page 171.
Coolant Temp
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
Transmission Temp
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
Oil Temp
Displays the actual oil temperature.
Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
Oil Life
Displays the remaining engine oil life as a
percentage.
To reset the Oil Life, you must hold the OK button.
The “Hold OK to Reset” instruction will be
displayed at all times, but the following conditions
will need to be met in order to reset Oil Life:
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position
If the conditions are met, holding the OK button will
reset the gauge and the numeric display will return
to 100%.
If the conditions are not met, a pop-up message
will display for five seconds, describing the
required conditions, and then the Oil Life screen
will reappear.
Battery Voltage
Displays the actual battery voltage.
Engine Hours — If Equipped
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Fuel Economy Menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. The
Fuel Economy Menu will display the following:
Two submenu pages that can be toggled
between using the left and right arrow
buttons; one with Current Value displayed and
one without the Current Value displayed:
Average Fuel Economy
(MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
Range To Empty (miles or km)
Current Fuel Economy
(MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
The Max and Min values will correspond to
the particular engine requirements
Hold OK to reset average fuel economy
information.
3
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push the left or
right arrow button to scroll through the Trip A
and Trip B submenus. The Trip information will
display the following:
Distance
Average Fuel Economy
Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Stop / Start – If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Stop/Start menu title is displayed
in the instrument cluster display.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Audio Menu displays in the
instrument cluster display.
Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until Messages is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. This feature shows the
number of stored warning messages. Pushing the
right arrow button will allow you to see what the
stored messages are.
NOTE:
The pop-up messages indicate the status of the
system and/or the conditions that need to be met.
Messages remain in the stored stack until
condition is cleared.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Screen Setup Menu displays in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
OK button to enter the submenus. The Screen
Setup feature allows you to change what
information is displayed in the instrument cluster
as well as the location that information is
displayed.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 91
Base Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options:
1 — Upper Left
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range
Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
2 — Upper Right
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range
Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
3
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3 — Center
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range
Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Audio Menu Title
Menu Title
Digital Speed
4 — Defaults
Restore
Cancel
Base Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options:
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 93
Speed Warning — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until Speed Warning is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
OK button to enter Speed Warning. Use the up
or down arrow button to turn the Speed Warning
ON or OFF, then push and release the OK button to
confirm the selection. If the ON status is selected,
use the up or down arrow button to set the
desired speed, then push the OK button to set the
speed for the Speed Warning. A Speed Warning
telltale will illuminate in the instrument cluster,
with a number matching the set speed, with a
pop-up message to inform the driver that the
Speed Warning has been set to the desired speed.
Each time the set speed is exceeded, a single
chime will sound and a pop-up warning message
will display. If the set speed is exceeded more than
2 mph (3 km/h), a continuous chime will sound for
up to 10 seconds, or until the speed is no longer
exceeded. The telltale in the instrument cluster will
also change from white to yellow, and a pop-up
warning message will pop-up on the instrument
cluster display.
NOTE:
Speed Warning is unavailable while KeySense is in
use.
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery
Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of
the electrical system and status of the vehicle
battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the 12 Volt vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will
take place to extend the driving time and distance
of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or
turning off non-essential 12 Volt electrical loads.
Load reduction will be functional when the vehicle
propulsion system is active.
The vehicle may not be running depending on the
High Voltage (HV) battery State Of Charge (SOC) or
temperature. It will display a message if there is a
risk of battery depletion to the point where the
vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply, or
will not restart after the current drive cycle.
When 12 Volt load reduction is activated, the
message “Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
Mode” will appear in the instrument cluster
display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a
low state of charge and continues to lose electrical
charge at a rate that the charging system cannot
sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from load
reduction. The charging system performs a diag-
nostic on the charging system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may
indicate a problem with the charging system
Ú page 95.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
effected by load reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
115 Volts AC Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
3
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
more of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system because
the electrical loads are larger than the capability
of charging system. The charging system is still
functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads
(e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior
lights, overloaded power outlets +12 Volts,
150W, USB ports) during certain driving condi-
tions (city driving, towing, frequent stopping).
Installing options like additional lights, upfitter
electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms
and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by
long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended period
of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was not
charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical load
left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appliances
like vacuum cleaners, game consoles and
similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On” or
“Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exte-
rior)
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volts, 150W, USB ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review
specifications if any (load and Ignition Off Draw
currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if
the message is still present during consecutive
trips and the evaluation of the vehicle and
driving pattern did not help to identify the cause.
TRIP COMPUTER
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the up or
down arrow button until “Trip Info” is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Navigate between Trip A or Trip B by using the
right and left arrow buttons.
For each trip the following information will be
displayed:
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A
since the last reset.
Shows the Average MPG for Trip A since the last
reset.
Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A since
the last reset. Elapsed time will increment when
the ignition switch is in the ON or START posi-
tion.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 95
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B
since the last reset.
Shows the Average MPG for Trip B since the last
reset.
Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip B since
the last reset. Elapsed time will increment when
the ignition switch is in the ON or START posi-
tion.
To Reset A Trip Function
Push and hold the OK button to reset the currently
displayed trip.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when applicable.
These indications are indicative and precautionary
and as such must not be considered as exhaustive
and/or alternative to the information contained in
the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the
information in this chapter in the event of a failure
indication. All active warning/indicator lights will
display first if applicable. The system check menu
may appear different based upon equipment
options and current vehicle status. Some warning/
indicator lights are optional and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and will
turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb
check when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the
air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the
fault is cleared. If the light is either not on during
startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays
on while the engine is running, there may
be a malfunction with the charging
system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake
light turns on it may indicate that the
parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level
is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock
Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full
mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates
a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or
that a problem with the Brake Booster has been
detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) /
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this
case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the
brake booster, the ABS pump will run when
applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation
may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual
brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning
Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level
in the master cylinder has dropped below a
specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
3
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD
failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along
with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS
system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF
position to the ON/RUN position. The light should
illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
should then turn off unless the parking brake is
applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does
not illuminate, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake
is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake appli-
cation.
Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when a
door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
This indicator will reflect which doors are
open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the EPS system
Ú page 116.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the ETC system.
If a problem is detected while the vehicle
is running, the light will either stay on or
flash depending on the nature of the problem.
Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed
in the PARK (P) position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains on with the vehicle running,
your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see
an authorized dealer for service as soon as
possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have
failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You
could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked
immediately.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could
pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service
should be obtained as soon as possible.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an
overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too high,
this indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the
upper limit, a continuous chime will sound for four
minutes or until the engine is able to cool;
whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C)
system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal,
turn the engine off immediately and call for service
Ú page 237.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
hood is left open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine
as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to
return to normal levels.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be
checked under the hood.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled,
a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When
driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will flash or remain on continuously and a chime
will sound
Ú page 174.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
— If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn
of a high transmission fluid temperature.
This may occur with strenuous usage
such as trailer towing. If this light turns
on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or
slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N), until the light turns off. Once the light
turns off, you may continue to drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over,
come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
3
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will flash at a fast rate
for approximately 15 seconds when the
vehicle security system is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle is
disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The
light will turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required as
soon as possible. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally,
assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position,
have the brake system inspected by an authorized
dealer.
Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the Electronic Park Brake is not
functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the
ESC system is Active. The ESC Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is
activated. It should go out with the engine running.
If the ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously
with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this warning light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers)
at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
cator Light come on momentarily each time the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an
ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC
system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission damage
or transmission failure.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 99
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard
Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. This warning light
will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF
to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas
cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light
after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if
the light stays on through several typical driving
styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive
normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to
alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced
by an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this
occurs.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches
approximately 1.85 gal (7 L) this warning
light will turn on, and remain on until fuel
is added.
A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel
Warning.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
Service Automatic Emergency Braking
(AEB) Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the AEB Warning
System. Contact an authorized dealer for
service
Ú page 168.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start system is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact
an authorized dealer for service
Ú page 117.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver,
occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the
vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel
economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing,
severe catalytic converter damage and power
loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
3
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that the
tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal
tire duration and fuel consumption may not be
guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire
pressure light when one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure light illuminates, you should stop
and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
light.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure
light. When the system detects a malfunction, the
light will flash for approximately one minute and
then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction light after replacing one or more tires
or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a
tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using
the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may result
when using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket
wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket
tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 101
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) OFF
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate
that Forward Collision Warning is off.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the cruise control is set to the desired
speed
Ú page 119.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the front fog lights are on.
KeySense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The KeySense indicator is illuminated
when a KeySense key is detected upon
startup of the vehicle. The indicator will
remain lit for the entire key cycle as a
reminder that the KeySense key is in use. While
the KeySense key is in use, the vehicle will respond
to settings associated with the KeySense profile
Ú page 12.
Parking/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
the park lights or headlights are turned
on.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop”
mode
Ú page 117.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal lamps
will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the
multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up
(right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
the cruise control is ready, but not set
Ú page 119.
Set Speed Display
The Set Speed Display indicator light
indicates the set speed for the Cruise
Control.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam headlights
are on. With the low beams activated,
push the multifunction lever forward
(toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high
beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high
beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to
pass” scenario.
3
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and automatic transmission
control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide
excellent performance and fuel economy, as well
as emissions well within current government
regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
information to assist your service technician in
making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually
be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information
related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need
to access this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system
Ú page 140.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control
system. It could also affect fuel economy and
driveability. The vehicle must be serviced
before any emissions tests can be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection
port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or
service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be
impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 103
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to
pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions
control system. Failure to pass could prevent
vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies
the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is
functioning and is not on when the
engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The
OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was
recently serviced, recently had a depleted battery
or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system
should be determined not ready for the I/M test,
your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station.
To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready,
you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the
ON position, you will see the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until
you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine.
This means that your vehicle's OBD II
system is not ready and you should not
proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain
fully illuminated until you place the ignition
in the off position or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see
an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing
more than drive your vehicle as you normally would
in order for your OBD II system to update. A
recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during
normal vehicle operation you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station.
The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the
MIL is on with the engine running.
3
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten
your seat belts.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the
NEUTRAL (N) or PARK (P) position. Apply the brake
before shifting to any driving range.
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing
the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle
fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
prior to the engine starting, push the button
again.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar
to an ignition switch. It has three positions; OFF,
ACC, and ON/RUN. To change the ignition positions
without starting the vehicle and to use the
accessories, follow these steps:
Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
place the ignition to the ACC position (instru-
ment cluster will display “ACC”).
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second
time to place the ignition to the ON/RUN posi-
tion (instrument cluster will display “ON/RUN”).
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third
time to return the ignition to the OFF position
(instrument cluster will display “OFF”).
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the
vehicle. Torque performance of the vehicle could
be reduced if both pedals are pressed at the same
time. If pressure is detected on both pedals simul-
taneously, a warning message will display in the
instrument cluster
Ú page 86.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter ’n Go™ in the ACC or ON/
RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
WARNING!
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
STARTING AND OPERATING 105
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
placing the vehicle in PARK if the situations below
occur. It is a back-up system and should not be
relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage
are outlined on the following pages.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle is in
PARK by looking for the “P” in the instrument
cluster display and on the gear selector. As an
added precaution, always apply the parking brake.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver
attempts to turn off the engine, if certain
conditions are met, the vehicle will AutoPark,
automatically shifting the vehicle’s transmission to
the PARK position. The gear selector will
automatically reset itself to the PARK position. The
vehicle’s ignition will then move to the OFF position
(engine off). When AutoPark is activated the
instrument cluster will display the message
“AutoPark Engaged”.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver has pushed the ENGINE START/STOP
button
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the
vehicle with the engine running, if certain
conditions are met, the vehicle will AutoPark,
automatically shifting the vehicle’s transmission to
the PARK position. The Electric Park Brake SAFE
HOLD feature will also activate in some conditions
Ú page 111.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s door is ajar
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “AutoPark Engaged” will display in
the instrument cluster.
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to place
the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL
CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying
that a solid (not blinking) “P” is indicated in
the instrument cluster display and near the
gear selector. If the "P" indicator is blinking,
your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your
vehicle into PARK. It is a back-up system and
should not be relied upon as the primary
method by which the driver shifts the vehicle
into PARK.
CAUTION!
Engine will remain running.
4
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
AutoPark In Stop/Start Autostop Mode
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s door is ajar
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled or brake pedal is
not pressed
The message “AutoPark Engaged” will display in
the instrument cluster.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indi-
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the
ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis-
sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
STARTING AND OPERATING 107
To Turn On The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing
the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition
switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Press on
the brake pedal, then push the parking brake
switch momentarily.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may Park.
PARK will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is
1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to
P” will display in the instrument cluster display if
vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). The
gear position indicator will blink continuously until
the gear selector is returned to the proper position,
or the requested shift can be completed.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
(BELOW –22°F O R −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures,
use of an externally powered electric engine block
heater (available from an authorized dealer) is
recommended.
AFTER STARTING — WARMING UP THE
E
NGINE
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it
will decrease as the engine warms up.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above
idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is not below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h)
when the driver shifts into PARK, the
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the
vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h)
and the above conditions are met, enabling
AutoPark. A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL position
can roll. As an added precaution, always apply
the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result
in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to
get it started. Vehicles equipped with an auto-
matic transmission cannot be started this
way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started,
ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start
from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly
Ú page 234.
4
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 STARTING AND OPERATING
TO TURN OFF THE ENGINE USING
ENGINE START/STOP B
UTTON
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF
position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds or three short pushes in a row with
the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h)
before the engine will shut off. The ignition
switch position will remain in the ACC position
until the gear selector is in PARK and the
button is pushed twice to the OFF position. If
the gear selector is not in PARK and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once,
the instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle
Not In Park” message and the engine will
remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of
the PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission
is in PARK, the system will automatically time out
after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will
switch to the OFF position.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and
permits quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical
outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the
engine block heater is recommended. For ambient
temperatures below -20°F (-29°C), the engine
block heater is required.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the
hood, behind to the passenger’s side headlamp.
Follow the steps below to properly use the engine
block heater:
1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind
the passenger’s side headlamp).
2. Undo the hook-and-loop strap that secures the
heater cord in place.
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and
plug it into a grounded, three-wire extension
cord.
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord
to the hook-and-loop strap and properly stow it
away behind the passenger’s side headlamp.
NOTE:
The engine block heater cord is a factory
installed option. If your vehicle is not equipped,
heater cords are available from an authorized
dealer.
The engine block heater will require 110 Volt AC
and 6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at
least one hour to have an adequate warming
effect on the engine.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine
and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your
vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
STARTING AND OPERATING 109
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within
the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good
break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low
gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory
is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant.
Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated
climate conditions under which vehicle operations
will occur. For the recommended viscosity and
quality grades
Ú page 249.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first
few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in
and not interpreted as a problem.
PARKING BRAKE
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB that offers
simple operation, and some additional features
that make the parking brake more convenient and
useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent
the vehicle from rolling while parked. Before
leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is applied. Also, be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK.
You can engage the parking brake in two ways;
Manually, by applying the EPB switch.
Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake
feature in the customer programmable features
Ú page 141.
The EPB is located in the integrated center stack.
Electric Park Brake Switch
To apply the parking brake manually, push the
switch momentarily. You may hear a sound from
the back of the vehicle while the parking brake
engages. Once the parking brake is fully engaged,
the BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster
and an indicator on the switch will illuminate.
If your foot is on the brake pedal while you apply
the parking brake, you may notice a small amount
of brake pedal movement. The parking brake can
be applied even when the ignition switch is OFF,
however, it can only be released when the ignition
switch in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB switch
is held for longer than 180 seconds. The light will
extinguish upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the
parking brake will automatically engage whenever
the transmission is placed into PARK. Once the
parking brake is engaged, the BRAKE warning
lamp in the instrument cluster and the LED
indicator on the switch will illuminate. If your foot is
on the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount
of brake pedal movement while the parking brake
is engaging.
The parking brake will release automatically when
the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position, the
transmission is in DRIVE or REVERSE, and the
driver seat belt is buckled and an attempt is made
to drive the vehicle away by pressing the
accelerator pedal.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition
switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Press on
the brake pedal, then push the parking brake
switch momentarily.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral
Oil in the engine or damage may result.
4
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
You may hear a sound from the back of the vehicle
while the parking brake disengages. You may also
notice a small amount of movement in the brake
pedal. Once the parking brake is fully disengaged,
the BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster
and the LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply
the parking brake before placing the gear selector
in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission
locking mechanism may make it difficult to move
the gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.
If exceptional circumstances should make it
necessary to engage the parking brake while the
vehicle is in motion, push on the EPB switch for as
long as engagement is desired. The BRAKE
warning lamp will illuminate, and a continuous
chime will sound. The rear stop lamps will also be
illuminated automatically while the vehicle
remains in motion.
To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is
in motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is
brought to a complete stop using the parking
brake, when the vehicle reaches approximately
3 mph (4.8 km/h), the parking brake will remain
engaged.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB
system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate. This
may be accompanied by the BRAKE warning lamp
flashing. In this case, urgent service of the EPB
system is required. Do not rely on the parking
brake to hold the vehicle stationary.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury
or damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to
brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may
allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or
injury.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake
engaged, or repeated use of the parking brake
to slow the vehicle may cause serious damage
to the brake system.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
STARTING AND OPERATING 111
(Continued)
Auto Park Brake
The Electric Park Brake (EPB) can be programmed
to be applied automatically whenever the vehicle is
at a standstill and the automatic transmission is
placed in PARK. Auto Park Brake is enabled and
disabled by customer selection through the
customer programmable features
Ú page 141.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park
Brake (EPB) system that will engage the parking
brake automatically if the vehicle is left unsecured.
If the automatic transmission is not in PARK, the
seat belt is unbuckled, the driver door is open, the
vehicle is at a standstill, and there is no attempt to
press the brake pedal or accelerator pedal, the
parking brake will automatically engage to prevent
the vehicle from rolling.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing
the EPB while the driver door is open and brake
pedal is pressed. Once manually bypassed,
SafeHold will be enabled again once the vehicle
reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled
to the OFF position and back to ON again.
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by an
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs
for which you have the knowledge and the right
equipment. You should only enter Brake Service
Mode during brake service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be
necessary for you or your technician to push the
rear piston into the rear caliper bore. With the
Electric Park Brake (EPB) system, this can only be
done after retracting the EPB actuator.
Fortunately, actuator retraction can be done easily
by entering Brake Service Mode in your vehicle
Ú page 141. This menu-based system will guide
you through the steps necessary to retract the EPB
actuator in order to perform rear brake service.
Brake Service Mode has requirements that must
be met in order to be activated:
The vehicle must be at a standstill.
The parking brake must be unapplied.
The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
While in Brake Service Mode, the EPB fault lamp
will flash continuously while the ignition switch is
ON.
When brake service work is complete, the following
steps must be followed to reset the parking brake
system to normal operation:
Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
Apply the EPB.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for
which you have the knowledge and the right
equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle
to a competent mechanic.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
4
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be in
PARK before the ignition can be turned to the OFF
position. This helps the driver avoid inadvertently
leaving the vehicle without placing the
transmission in PARK. This system also locks the
transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in
the OFF position
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the
ignition is in the ACC position (even though the
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission is
in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC
position) before exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indi-
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the
ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis-
sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING! CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above
idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
STARTING AND OPERATING 113
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) S YSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of
PARK, the engine must be running and the brake
pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must also
be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at
low speeds.
9-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission is controlled using a rotary
electronic gear selector located on the center
console. The transmission gear selector has PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and LOW shift
positions. Using the LOW position manually
downshifts the transmission to a lower gear based
on vehicle speed. The transmission gear range
(PRNDL) is displayed both above the gear selector
and in the instrument cluster. To select a gear
range, simply rotate the gear selector. Push down
on the gear selector and then rotate it, to access
the L position. You must also press the brake pedal
to shift the transmission out of PARK (or NEUTRAL,
when stopped or moving at low speeds). To shift
past multiple gear ranges at once (such as PARK to
DRIVE), simply rotate the gear selector to the
appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range for
normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission gear
(for example, driver selects PARK while driving),
the position indicator will blink continuously until
the selector is returned to the proper position, or
the requested shift can be completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts
its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along
with environmental and road conditions. The
transmission electronics are self-calibrating;
therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition,
and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
The 9-speed transmission has been developed to
meet the needs of current and future FWD/AWD
vehicles. Software and calibration is refined to
optimize the customer’s driving experience and
fuel economy. By design, some vehicle and
driveline combinations utilize NINTH gear only in
very specific driving situations and conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when shifting between these gears.
Transmission Gear Selector
GEAR RANGES
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting
from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before acceler-
ating. This is especially important when the engine
is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK
while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.
4
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb
on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the ignition off.
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indi-
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the
ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis-
sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear selector
out of PARK, you must start the engine, and
also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING!
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
STARTING AND OPERATING 115
The following indicators should be used to ensure
that you have properly engaged the transmission
into the PARK position:
Look at the transmission gear position display
and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P),
and is not blinking.
With the brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come
to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The
engine may be started in this range. Apply the
parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK
if you must exit the vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The
transmission automatically upshifts through all
forward gears. The DRIVE position provides
optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal
operating limits, the transmission controller may
modify the transmission shift schedule, reduce
engine torque, and/or expand the range of torque
converter clutch engagement. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light will
illuminate, a warning message will appear in the
instrument cluster, and the transmission may
operate differently until the transmission cools
down.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation
may be modified depending on engine and
transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. This feature improves warm-up time of the
engine and transmission to achieve maximum
efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter
clutch, and shifts into EIGHTH or NINTH gear, are
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm
Ú page 116. Normal operation will resume once
the transmission temperature has risen to a
suitable level.
LOW (L)
Use this range for engine braking when
descending very steep grades. In this range, the
transmission will downshift for increased engine
braking. To access the LOW position, push down
on the gear selector and rotate it fully clockwise.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically
for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected
that could result in transmission damage,
Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this
mode, the transmission may operate only in a fixed
gear, or may remain in NEUTRAL. The Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp
Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven to
an authorized dealer for service without damaging
the transmission.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing
traffic or road conditions. You might lose control
of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
can cause severe transmission damage.
If Recreational Towing
Ú page 137.
If Towing A Disabled Vehicle
Ú page 240.
4
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 STARTING AND OPERATING
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If
not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
engine turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at
your earliest possible convenience. An authorized
dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the
condition of your transmission. If the transmission
cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is
required.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has
been included in the automatic transmission on
your vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter
engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This
may result in a slightly different feeling or response
during normal operation in the upper gears. When
the vehicle speed drops or during some
accelerations, the clutch automatically
disengages.
NOTE:
The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the engine and/or transmission is warm (usually
after 1 to 3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving). Because
the engine speed is higher when the torque
converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if
the transmission is not shifting properly when the
vehicle is cold. This is normal. The torque converter
clutch will function normally once the powertrain is
sufficiently warm.
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise
Cancellation system. This system is designed to
address exhaust and engine noise. The system
relies on four microphones embedded in the
headliner, which monitor exhaust and engine
noise, and assists an onboard frequency
generator, which creates counteracting sound
waves in the audio system’s speakers. This helps
keep the vehicle quiet at idle and during drive.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will provide
increased vehicle response and ease of
maneuverability. The power steering system
adapts to different driving conditions.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could
pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service
should be obtained as soon as possible.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
STARTING AND OPERATING 117
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “POWER
STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is
displayed on the instrument cluster screen, this
indicates an over temperature condition in the
power steering system. Once driving conditions are
safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few
moments until the icon and message turn off
Ú page 95.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING" or
"POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF -
SERVICE SYSTEM” message and a
steering wheel icon are displayed on the
instrument cluster screen, it indicates that the
vehicle needs to be taken to an authorized dealer
for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power
steering assistance
Ú page 95.
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no
longer operational, it is still possible to steer the
vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a
substantial increase in steering effort, espe-
cially at low speeds and during parking maneu-
vers.
The power steering system is fully electric; it
requires no power steering fluid.
If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce
fuel consumption. The system will stop the engine
automatically during a vehicle stop if the required
conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal,
pressing the accelerator pedal or shifting out of
DRIVE (D) will automatically re-start the engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy-duty
starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded
engine parts to handle the additional engine starts.
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
normal customer engine start. At that time, the
system will go into STOP/START READY and if all
other conditions are met, can go into a STOP/
START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE.
To Activate Auto STOP/START, The Following Must
Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY
state. A STOP/START READY message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster within the
Stop/Start section
Ú page 95.
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The gear selector must be in a forward gear and
the brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will
move to the zero position and the Stop/Start
telltale will illuminate indicating you are in
Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained
throughout the Auto Stop/Start process.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
many safety and comfort conditions for Stop/Start
and ensure they are fulfilled. Detailed information
about the operation of the Stop/Start system may
be viewed in the instrument cluster display Stop/
Start screen. In the following situations the engine
will not stop:
If Stop/Start is manually disabled by the Stop/
Start OFF button.
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
Driver’s door is not closed.
Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
Battery charge is low. During this time a
message will display "Stop/Start Not Ready
Battery Charging".
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
4
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 STARTING AND OPERATING
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower
speed.
HVAC is set to MAX A/C.
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
The transmission is not in a forward gear.
Hood is open.
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pres-
sure.
Accelerator pedal input.
Engine temperature is too high.
5 mph (8 km/h) threshold has not been
achieved from previous Autostop.
Steering angle is beyond threshold.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
several times without the Stop/Start system going
into a STOP/START READY state under more
extreme conditions of the items listed above.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN AUTO
S
TOP/START
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when
the brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is
pressed. The transmission will automatically
re-engage upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Auto Stop/Start:
The transmission selector is moved out of
DRIVE.
To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted.
Battery voltage drops too low. During this time a
message will display "Stop/Start Not Ready
Battery Charging".
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
Steering angle beyond threshold.
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE
S
TOP/START SYSTEM
Stop/Start OFF Switch
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in the
instrument cluster display and the Autostop mode
will be disabled
Ú page 95.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to the
ON position every time the ignition is turned OFF
and back ON.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
STARTING AND OPERATING 119
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
After turning off the Stop/Start system, push the
Stop/Start OFF switch again (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system,
the system will not shut down the engine. A
“SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message and a
yellow Stop/Start telltale will appear in the
instrument cluster display
Ú page 86.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message
appears in the instrument cluster display, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise
Control system for cruising at a constant preset
speed.
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
25 mph (40 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right
side of the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise
Control. The cruise indicator light in the instrument
cluster display will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the on/off button a second time. The
cruise indicator light will turn off. The system
should be turned off when not in use.
1 — On/Off
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (+)/Accel
4 — RES/Resume
5 — SET (-)/Decel
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your
vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and
you could lose control and have an accident. Do
not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not
in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set
the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have an
accident. Always leave the system off when you
are not using it.
4
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or
SET (-) button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed,
push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease
speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button is
released, then the new set speed will be estab-
lished.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button is
released, then the new set speed will be estab-
lished.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When
the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the
set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or
gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive
without Cruise Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button,
or normal brake pressure will deactivate the Cruise
Control system without erasing the set speed from
memory.
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in
the OFF position erases the set speed from
memory.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your
vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and
you could lose control and have an accident. Do
not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
STARTING AND OPERATING 121
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides
visual and audible indications of the distance
between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle
when backing up (e.g. during a parking maneuver).
If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic
transmission, the vehicle brakes may be
automatically applied and released when
performing a reverse parking maneuver if the
system detects a possible collision with an
obstacle.
NOTE:
The driver can override the automatic braking
function by pressing the gas pedal, turning
ParkSense off via ParkSense switch, or
changing the gear while the automatic brakes
are being applied.
Automatic brakes will not be available if Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) is not available.
Automatic brakes will not be available if there is
a faulted condition detected with the ParkSense
Park Assist system or the Braking System
Module.
The automatic braking function may not provide
enough vehicle deceleration to avoid colliding
with a detected obstacle depending on vehicle
speed, road conditions, and brake capability.
The automatic braking function may not be
applied fast enough for moving obstacles that
approach the rear of the vehicle from the left
and/or right sides.
The automatic braking function can be
enabled/disabled from the Customer Program-
mable Features section of the Uconnect system.
ParkSense will retain its last known configura-
tion state for the automatic braking function
through ignition cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to
assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions with
detected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE
gear.
NOTE:
The system is provided to assist the driver and
not to substitute the driver.
The driver must stay in full control of the
vehicle's acceleration and braking and is
responsible for controlling the vehicle's move-
ments.
For limitations of this system and
recommendations/precautions, see
Ú page 125.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at
this gear selector position, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to
approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in
REVERSE and above the system's operating speed,
a warning will appear within the instrument cluster
display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The
system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
4
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The
sensors can detect obstacles from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from
the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction,
depending on the location, type and orientation of
the obstacle.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the
Customer-Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect system
Ú page 141.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display
Ú page 86. It
provides visual warnings to indicate the distance
between the rear fascia/bumper and the detected
obstacle.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle
has been detected, the warning display will turn on
indicating the system status, and remain on until
the vehicle is moved out of REVERSE.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in one or more regions based
on the obstacle’s distance and location relative to
the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region,
the display will show a single solid arc in the center
rear region and will produce a one-half second
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to
the vehicle and the tone will change from slow, to
fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
rear region, the display will show a single flashing
arc in the left and/or right rear region and will
produce a fast tone. As the vehicle moves closer to
the obstacle, the display will show the single arc
moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from fast to continuous.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
Rear ParkSense Arcs
1 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 4 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
2 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 5 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 6 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
4
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert
operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2-
Second Tone
(for rear center
only)
Slow
(for rear center
only)
Slow
(for rear center
only)
Fast
(for rear center
only)
Fast Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
STARTING AND OPERATING 125
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the ParkSense switch, located on
the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable
the system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five
seconds. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the
instrument cluster display will show the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense switch LED will be off when the system
is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and
requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will
blink momentarily, and then the LED will be on.
NOTE:
When KeySense feature is present, the ParkSense
system will reject customer input to turn the
system off via the hard switch. The instrument
cluster display will show a "KeySense in Use
Selected Feature Cannot be Disabled" message.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE REAR PARK
A
SSIST SYSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear
Park Assist system has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a
single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”. When the
gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system
has detected a faulted condition, the instrument
cluster display
Ú page 86 will show the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS"
or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message for five seconds while the
vehicle is in REVERSE. The vehicle graphic will
remain displayed for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS” appears in the instrument cluster
display, make sure the outer surface and the
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt, or other obstruction
and then cycle the ignition. If the message
continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” appears in the instrument cluster
display, see an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash
soap, and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard
cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the rear fascia/bumper is free of
snow, ice, mud, dirt, and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of Park-
Sense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF”. Further-
more, once you turn ParkSense off, it remains
off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the
ignition.
When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off,
the instrument cluster display will show “PARK-
SENSE OFF” for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
4
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of
the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The
sensors must not be covered with ice, snow,
slush, mud, dirt, or debris. Failure to do so can
result in the system not working properly. The
ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle
behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the
fascia/bumper.
ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate
is in the open position.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers,
trailer hitches, etc., are placed within 12 inches
(30 cm) of the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do
so can result in the system misinterpreting a
close object as a blockage or sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS” message to be displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to
see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of
your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the
touchscreen display along with a caution note
“Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of the
screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear.
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera is located on
the rear of the vehicle above the rear license plate.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly be disconnected from the vehicle
when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball
will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly,
depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-
mended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using ParkSense.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has program-
mable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect system
Ú page 141.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
camera delay turned off), the rear camera mode is
exited and the previous screen appears.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
camera delay turned on), the camera image will
continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds
unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK, or the
ignition is placed in the OFF position.
A touchscreen button to disable display of the
camera image is made available when the vehicle
is not in REVERSE gear. Display of the camera
image after shifting out of REVERSE can be
disabled via a touchscreen button personalization
entry in the camera settings menu.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and
its projected backup path based on the steering
wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to
the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the
lens.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors inside
the pipe seal the system.
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red
0 - 1 ft
(0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft
(30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently
over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or
the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place fuel
containers on the ground while filling.
4
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
1. Put the vehicle in PARK and switch the
ignition OFF.
2. Push the center-rear edge of the fuel filler door
(3 o'clock position) and release to open.
Rotate to full open position.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push
around the perimeter of the fuel door to break the
ice buildup.
Fuel Filler Door
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe;
the nozzle opens and holds both flapper doors
while refueling.
4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
5. Keep the nozzle in the filler for five seconds
after the nozzle clicks to allow fuel to drain
from the nozzle.
6. Remove the fuel filler nozzle.
7. To close the fuel filler door, push the
center-rear edge (3 o’clock position) of the fuel
filler door and then release. The fuel filler door
will latch closed.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
filler door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push
on the fuel filler door around the perimeter to
break the ice build-up.
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side door or
pillar.
This label contains the month and year of
manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR), and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). A
Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is included on this
label and indicates the Month, Day and Hour of
manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
options and cargo. The label also specifies
maximum capacities of front and rear GAWR. Total
load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear
GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable
load weight a truck can carry, including the weight
of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the
front and rear axles. The load must be distributed
in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is
not exceeded.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components
in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity
(axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or
suspension components sometimes specified by
purchasers for increased durability does not
necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including
vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no
occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The
front and rear curb weight values are determined
by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale
before any occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front
and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be
determined by weighing it when it is loaded and
ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not
been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of
the vehicle should then be determined separately
to be sure that the load is properly distributed over
the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may
show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles
has been exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from
front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the
heavier items down low and be sure that the
weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items
securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles
and the way the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you can
reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a
trailer, carefully review this information to tow your
load as efficiently and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If
you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle handles. This could
cause you to lose control. Overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
4
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will
assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you
do not exceed the GVWR
Ú page 128.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of
all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the
trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation"
condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put
your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The
entire weight of the trailer must be supported by
the scale.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not
exceed either front or rear GAWR
Ú page 128.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch
ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The Frontal Area is the maximum height multiplied
by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that
can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable
friction associated with the telescoping motion to
dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions
while traveling.
The electronic TSC (if equipped) recognizes a
swaying trailer and automatically applies individual
wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A Weight-Carrying Hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch
ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle.
These kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow
small and medium sized trailers.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle
and have a collision.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A Weight-Distributing Hitch works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to
the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic
and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. TSC and a Weight-Distributing (load equalizing) Hitch are recommended for heavier
TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply with GAWR requirements.
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting
the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight-Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in a collision.
Weight-Distributing Hitch systems may not be compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recre-
ational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,721 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
4
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the
Tire and Loading Information placard.
VEHICLE LOADING CHART
Follow these steps to determine the total weight
the vehicle can carry:
1. Determine the cargo capacity of your vehicle.
Load Capacity = GVWR – Curb
(weight of vehicle full fluids NO occupants).
2. Determine occupant count.
For calculation purposes, average weight of
an occupant is 150 lb (68 kg).
EXAMPLE:
GVWR = 6,005 lb (2,723 kg)
CURB = 4,500 lb (2,041 kg)
Load Capacity = GVWR – CURB = 6,005 lb
(2,723 kg) - 4,500 lb (2,041 kg) = 1,505 lb
(682 kg)
4 Occupants (at 150 lb [68 kg]) + Max Trailer =
1,505 lb (682 kg) – 600 lb (272 kg) (4 x 150 lb
[68 kg]) – 360 lb (163 kg) (10% of 3,600 lb
[1,632 kg]) = 545 lb (247 kg) of cargo in vehicle
Engine/Transmission
Trailer Tow
Package
GCWR Frontal Area Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW
3.6L/Automatic
Yes 8,600 lb (3,900 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 3,600 lb (1,632 kg) 360 lb (163 kg)
No 6,500 lb (2,948 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 1500 lb (680 kg) 149 lb (67 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
Make sure loading does not exceed GAWR of front or rear axles.
GAWR is found on the certification label in the driver’s side door jamb.
Number Of Persons / Weight Of Occupants Max Cargo No Trailer Maximum Trailer TW
Max Cargo With
Maximum TW
360 lb (136 kg)
2 People / 300 lb (136 kg) 1,205 lb (546 kg)
1,205 lb (546 kg) –
360 lb (136 kg) =
845 lb (383 kg)
845 lb (383 kg)
4 people / 600 lb (272 kg) 955 lb (433 kg)
955 lb (433 kg) –
360 lb (136 kg) =
545 lb (247 kg)
545 lb (247 kg)
7 people / 1050 lb (476 kg) 455 lb (206 kg)
455 lb (206 kg) –
360 lb (163 kg) = 95
lb (43 kg)
95 lb (43 kg)
4
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your fascia/bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equip-
ment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle
Ú page 279.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Scheduled
Servicing”
Ú page 243. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven.
The engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that
a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps the engine and other parts
of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could lose
control of your vehicle and have a collision.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading
can cause a loss of control, poor performance
or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmis-
sion, steering, suspension, chassis structure
or tires.
Safety chains must always be used between
your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the
chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle
hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer
tongue and allow enough slack for turning
corners.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when
towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to
the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR
and GAWR limits.
For further information Ú page 282.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system
or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of
the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking
and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer with
electronically actuated brakes. When towing a
trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated
brake system, an electronic brake controller is
not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers
in excess of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are
required for motoring safety.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on
a grade. When parking, apply the parking
brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle
transmission in PARK. For four-wheel drive
vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in
NEUTRAL. Always, block or "chock" the trailer
wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the
tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your
brake system and cause it to fail. You might
not have brakes when you need them and
could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for
additional space between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could
result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do
this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear,
higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping
distances.
4
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved
trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer
connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical connect)
into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. For increased
engine braking on steep downhill grades, select
the LOW range.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
disengage until you can get back to cruising
speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light
loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
NOTE:
To avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake (EPB)
engagement, you must ensure that the Auto
Park Brake feature is disabled before towing
this vehicle (if rear wheels are on the ground).
The Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or
disabled via the customer programmable
features
Ú page 141.
When towing your vehicle, always follow appli-
cable state and provincial laws. Contact state
and provincial Highway Safety offices for addi-
tional details.
If your vehicle is disabled and in need of
commercial towing service, for further informa-
tion
Ú page 240.
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
Recreational Towing
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front
wheels are OFF the ground. This may be
accomplished using a tow dolly (front wheels off
the ground) or vehicle trailer (all four wheels off the
ground). If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the transmission in PARK.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly,
following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
Towing Condition Wheel OFF The Ground FWD Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires
towing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF
the ground.
Ensure that the EPB is released, and remains
released, while being towed.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
4
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 STARTING AND OPERATING
7. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the vehicle.
8. Press and hold the brake pedal.
9. Release the parking brake.
10. Turn the ignition OFF.
11. Release the brake pedal.
DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Information in this section will aid in safe
controlled launches in adverse conditions.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other
slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to
pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon
occurs when there is a difference in the surface
traction under the front (driving) wheels.
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible
for a wedge of water to build-up between the tire
and road surface. This is hydroplaning and may
cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control
and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the
following precautions should be observed:
Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads
are slushy.
Slow down if the road has standing water or
puddles.
Replace the tires when tread wear indicators
first become visible.
Keep tires properly inflated.
Maintain sufficient distance between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a
collision in a sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden
pulling of the front wheels. You could lose
control of the vehicle and possibly have a
collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm
run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road
or path's surface and cause your vehicle to sink
into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or
rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
(Continued)
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following
Warnings and Cautions before doing so.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed
5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases
stopping distances. Therefore, after driving
through standing water, drive slowly and
lightly press on the brake pedal several times
to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom
of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the
path that is under water and if there are any
obstacles in the way before driving through
the standing water.
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize
wave effects.
Driving through standing water may cause
damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
(i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky
or foamy in appearance) after driving through
standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated,
as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause
serious internal damage to the engine. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
4
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 5
With 7-inch Display or Uconnect 5/5 NAV With
10.1-inch Display system, refer to your Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact software
for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may
be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless
communications. Vehicle software technology
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC,
working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes
appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a
computer or other devices, your vehicle may
require software updates to improve the usability
and performance of your systems or to reduce the
potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access
to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security breach,
vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about avail-
able Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully
intercept information and private communications
without your consent
Ú page 102.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems
are breached. It may be possible that vehicle
systems, including safety related systems,
could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
ONLY insert trusted devices/components into
your vehicle. Media of unknown origin could
possibly contain malicious software, and if
installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest
authorized dealer immediately.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
MULTIMEDIA 141
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the instrument
panel. These buttons allow you to access and
change the Customer Programmable Features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the
instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/
Enter control knob located on the right side. Turn
the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings. Push the center of the control
knob one or more times to select or change a
setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off
and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn
off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or
tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu
or certain option on the Uconnect system.
Push and hold the Power button on the radio’s
faceplate for a minimum of 15 seconds to reset
the radio.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display
For the Uconnect 5 With 7-inch Display and the
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display
Press the Vehicle button, then press the Settings
tab on the top of the touchscreen. In this menu, the
Uconnect system allows you to access all of the
available programmable features.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in
the desired menu, press and release the preferred
setting option until a check mark appears next to
the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Once the setting is complete, press the
Vehicle button to exit to the screen. Pressing the
Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through
the available settings.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
5
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 MULTIMEDIA
KeySense
The vehicle’s KeySense settings are protected by a unique four-digit PIN, which the vehicle owner creates when accessing the specific settings for the first
time. This four-digit PIN can only be reset by an authorized dealer.
After pressing the KeySense button on the touchscreen, and entering the KeySense PIN, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — If Equipped
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal
when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The
“Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the object is closer to the
vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is at
a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system on or off.
The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible chime when a collision
is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an audible
chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
ParkSense — If Equipped
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
detected. The “Sound Only” setting will provide an audible chime when an
object is detected. The “Sound and Display” setting will provide both an
audible chime and a visual display when an object is detected.
Front ParkSense Volume — If Equipped
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available
settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume — If Equipped
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available
settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist — If Equipped This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
MULTIMEDIA 143
Display
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected
in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert
lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both
the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Maximum Vehicle Speed
This setting adjusts the Maximum Vehicle Speed. This feature can be set to
65, 70, 75, 80, or 85 mph (90, 95, 100, 105 or 110 km/h) by using the “-”
and “+” options.
Start Up Fuel Level Message This setting will turn on the Start Up Fuel Level Message on or off.
Earlier Low Fuel Alert This setting will turn on the Earlier Low Fuel Alert on or off.
Setting Name Description
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument
Cluster Display. The available languages are English, Français, and Español.
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system
set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust
the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the
brightness of the display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To
access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will
increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
5
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 MULTIMEDIA
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To
access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will
increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the theme of the radio.
Units
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel
Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi,
kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Current Consumption” (MPG
[US], MPG[UK], L/100 km, or km/L) units of measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Control Screen Timeout — If Equipped
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after
five seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Instrument Cluster Display.
Ready To Drive Pop-Ups — If Equipped
This setting will enable the Ready To Drive Pop-Ups in the Instrument Cluster
Display.
Setting Name Description
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
MULTIMEDIA 145
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — Located In Automatic Emergency
Braking Submenu
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal
when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The
“Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the object is closer to the
vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is at
a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking
Submenu
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off”
setting will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide
only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active
Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and apply some brake pressure
when a collision is detected.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking
Submenu
This setting will turn the Pedestrian Emergency Braking system “Off” or to
“Warning & Active Braking”.
ParkSense — If Equipped
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
detected. The “Sound Only” setting will provide an audible chime when an
object is detected. The “Sound and Display” setting will provide both an
audible chime and a visual display when an object is detected.
Rear ParkSense Volume — If Equipped
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available
settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist — If Equipped This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
Sliding Door Alert — If Equipped This setting will turn the Sliding Door Alert on and off.
5
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 MULTIMEDIA
Clock & Date
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected
in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The
“Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors.
The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both the lights on the outside
mirrors and an audible chime.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
KeySense — If Equipped This setting will access KeySense features.
Setting Name
Description
After pressing the Clock & Date button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system
will control the time via the GPS location.
Set Time This setting will allow you to manually set the time of your clock.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS
must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the
time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour
format.
Set Date
This setting will allow you to set the date by day, month, and year
(DD/MM/YY).
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
MULTIMEDIA 147
Phone/Bluetooth®
Set Time Hours — If Equipped
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for
this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours. The “-”
setting will decrease the hours.
Set Time Minutes — If Equipped
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off
for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The
“-” setting will decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar — If Equipped This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Setting Name Description
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio
device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
Setting Name Description
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster
Display.
Do Not Disturb — If Equipped
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb settings menu. The settings are “Auto
Reply” (both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default), and “Custom
Auto Reply Message” (create message).
Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
Do Not Disturb All
This setting will open the “Do Not Disturb All” settings menu. The available
options are “On” and “Off”.
Enable Two Active Phones — If Equipped
This setting will enable or disable two active phones with the vehicle. The
setting options are “On” and “Off”.
5
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 MULTIMEDIA
Voice — If Equipped
Navigation — If Equipped
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Description
Voice Options
This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male”
or “Female”.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always”
setting will always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show
the Command List and provide a brief description of what the command does.
The “Never” setting will turn the Command List off.
Wake Up Word
This setting will allow you to turn the voice recognition “Wake Up” word on or
off. The available options are “Off”, “Hey Uconnect”, and “Hey Chrysler”.
Voice Barge-In
This setting will allow you to turn the voice recognition barge-in feature
on or off.
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can
change which icons display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
MULTIMEDIA 149
Camera
Mirrors & Wipers
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when
shifting out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off.
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
Setting Name Description
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
5
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of
the vehicle purchased.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights
to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”,
“30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights
to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”,
“30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Flash Lights With Sliding Door
This setting will flash the lights when the sliding door reverses. The available
options are “On” and “Off”.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
MULTIMEDIA 151
Brakes
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Description
Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service This setting will allow you to retract the brakes for servicing.
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
The Auto Door Locks feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 12 mph
(20 km/h). The Auto Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see an authorized
dealer for service.
Setting Name Description
Auto Door Locks — If Equipped
This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when the
vehicle reaches 12 mph (19 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit
This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from
the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
5
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 MULTIMEDIA
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key
fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed.
The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed
once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is
pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start
This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the
key fob.
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob
are needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock
the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting
will unlock all doors with only one push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless
Enter-N-Go™) on or off.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have
been linked to the key fob.
Power Liftgate Alert
This setting will chime an audible alert when the power liftgate is raising or
lowering. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Sliding Door Alert
This setting will chime an audible alert when the sliding door reverses or
sense an obstacle. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Flash Lights with Sliding Door
This setting will flash the lights when the sliding door is opening. Selectable
options are “On” and “Off”.
Setting Name Description
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
MULTIMEDIA 153
Seats & Comfort
Key Off Options
When the Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start
has been activated or the vehicle has been started.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With Vehicle
Start — If Equipped
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or
heated steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is
started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote
Start” setting will only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start.
The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle
is started.
When the Key Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only activate
when the ignition is set to OFF.
Setting Name Description
Key Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is
turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The
available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on
after the vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount of
time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time.
Radio Off With Door
This setting will turn the radio off when the driver or passenger door is
opened. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
5
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio
location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back
and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio
location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting,
the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings
are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound — If Equipped This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the
AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Auto On Radio
This setting will automatically turn on when the vehicle is in ON/RUN or will
recall whether it was on or off at last ignition OFF. The selectable options are
“On”, “Off”, and “Recall Last”.
Volume Adjustment
This setting allows you to adjust the volume levels for features such as Media,
Phone, Navigation, and Voice Recognition.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
MULTIMEDIA 155
SiriusXM® Setup
System Information
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used
to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
Setting Name Description
SiriusXM® Account, Profiles & Settings
This setting will allow you to view your SiriusXM® account information, profiles
linked to the system, and the various settings you have saved and stored to
those profiles.
Block Explicit This setting will allow you to block explicit content by turning it on or off.
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
Setting Name Description
Version Information
When this feature is selected, a Version Information screen will appear,
displaying information about the version of your radio.
License Information
When this feature is selected, a License Information screen will appear,
displaying the licensing information of your radio.
5
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 MULTIMEDIA
Reset
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings.
These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
Setting Name Description
Restart Radio This setting will restart the radio.
Restore Settings to Default
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
default.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal
data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
Reset Wi-Fi Password for Projection This setting will reset your Wi-Fi password for projection.
Factory Reset
This setting will factory reset the radio. It may cause the radio to restart
multiple times and the backup camera, radio, SOS, and several driving
assistance features will not be available. Once the system resets, you will
need to turn the vehicle off then back on to complete the process.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
MULTIMEDIA 157
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being
on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy
performance from your radio. This condition may
be lessened or eliminated by repositioning the
mobile phone within the vehicle. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily improve from repositioning
the mobile phone, it is recommended that the
volume be turned down or off during mobile phone
operation when not using the Uconnect system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless
radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency
exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio
will be used in such a manner that the radio is 8 in
(20 cm) or further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the use
of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning
on the wireless radio
Ú page 304.
5
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and
brake performance under most braking conditions.
The system automatically prevents wheel lock and
enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that
the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle
is started and driven. During this self-check, you
may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels are beginning
to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel,
bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops
may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may
continue to hear for a short time after the stop)
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the
stop
The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification
may result in degraded ABS performance.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to interfer-
ence caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This
interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qual-
ified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer.
Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you
need to slow down or stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING!
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
SAFETY 159
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion
of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional
brake system will continue to operate normally if
the ABS Warning Light is on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS
Warning Light does not come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
REAR SEAT REMINDER ALERT (RSRA)
RSRA will consider the presence of an object in the
rear seat when a rear entry/exit door is opened at
the beginning of each key cycle. To activate, the
rear door must be open for more than one second
and the vehicle must be placed in the ON/RUN
position within 10 minutes. When the potential
presence of an object is determined and/or
otherwise inferred, a message will appear in the
instrument cluster display reminding driver to
check the rear seat(s) immediately after key off
accompanied by an alert upon exiting the vehicle.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This system
includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll Mitigation
(ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Hill Start
Assist (HSA), and Traction Control System
(TCS).These systems work together to enhance
both vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Dynamic
Steering Torque (DST), Ready Alert Braking (RAB),
Rain Brake Support (RBS) and Trailer Sway Control
(TSC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency
braking situation by sensing the rate and amount
of brake application and then applies optimum
pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stopping
sequence (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake
system is not functioning properly and that
immediate service is required. If the Brake System
Warning Light does not come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot
prevent collisions, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a
BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner, which could
jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
others.
6
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 SAFETY
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
DST is a feature of the ESC and Electric Power
Steering (EPS) modules that provides torque at the
steering wheel for certain driving conditions in
which the ESC module is detecting vehicle
instability. The torque that the steering wheel
receives is only meant to help the driver realize
optimal steering behavior in order to reach/
maintain vehicle stability. The only notification the
driver receives that the feature is active is the
torque applied to the steering wheel.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through small
torques on the steering wheel, which means the
effectiveness of the DST feature is highly
dependent on the driver’s sensitivity and overall
reaction to the applied torque. It is very important
to realize that this feature will not steer the vehicle,
meaning the driver is still responsible for steering
the vehicle.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
The EBD function manages the distribution of the
braking torque between the front and rear axles by
limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is
done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid
vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear axle from
entering the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) before
the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines
that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle
and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially
cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen
the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during
severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
road conditions, leaving the roadway, striking
objects or other vehicles.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC
corrects for oversteering or understeering of the
vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel(s) to assist in counteracting the above
conditions. Engine power may also be reduced to
help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC
applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to
assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence the
chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM
cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers,
especially those that involve leaving the roadway
or striking objects or other vehicles. The
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user's safety
or the safety of others.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
SAFETY 161
(Continued)
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
located in the instrument cluster will start to flash
as soon as the ESC system becomes active. The
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when the TCS is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used for
most driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes
should only be used for specific reasons as noted
in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push
the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator
Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again,
momentarily push the ESC OFF button and the ESC
OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
NOTE:
When driving with snow chains, or when starting off
in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable
to allow more wheel spin. This can be accom-
plished by momentarily pushing the ESC OFF
button to enter partial mode “Partial Off” mode.
Once the situation requiring “Partial Off” mode is
overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
pushing the ESC OFF button. This may be done
while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
tions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to
inappropriate driver input for the conditions.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle, and
may negatively affect the performance of the
ESC system. Changes to the steering system,
suspension, braking system, tire type and size
or wheel size may adversely affect ESC perfor-
mance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn
tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle mainte-
nance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING!
6
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 SAFETY
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come
on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN mode. It should go out with the
engine running. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light comes on continuously with the
engine running, a malfunction has been detected
in the ESC system. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer
as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes
when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates
that the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
is in a reduced mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on
momentarily each time the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position, the ESC system will be on even if it was
turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver
releases the brake while stopped on an incline,
HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a
short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system will
release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for
HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward
gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE (R)
gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the trans-
mission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS function-
ality of ESC (except for the limited slip feature
described in the TCS section) has been
disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode,
the engine power reduction feature of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
SAFETY 163
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, proceed as follows:
Ú page 141.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full
braking during emergency braking situations. It
anticipates when an emergency braking situation
may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is
released by the driver. The Electronic Brake
Control (EBC) system will prepare the brake system
for a panic stop.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet
conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount
of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on
the front brake rotors. It functions when the
windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When RBS
is active, there is no notification to the driver and
no driver interaction is required.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of
each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is
detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to the
spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce vehicle power to
provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A
feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD)
functions similarly to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one
wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the
other, the system will apply the brake of the
spinning wheel. This will allow more vehicle torque
to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD
may remain enabled even if TCS and the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) are in reduced modes.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is
not a substitute for active driving involvement. It
is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people,
and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to
maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision or
serious personal injury.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there
may not be enough brake pressure to hold
both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when
the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid
rolling down an incline while resuming accel-
eration, manually activate the trailer brake or
apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to
releasing the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle.
Also, be certain to place the transmission in
PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
6
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 SAFETY
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow
the trailer tongue weight recommendations
Ú page 129.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” mode.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The BSM system uses two radar sensors, located
inside the rear fascia/bumper, to detect highway
licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones
from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light
will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or
REVERSE (R) and enters standby mode when the
vehicle is in PARK (P).
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one
lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft
(3.7 m). The zone length starts at the outside
rearview mirror and extends approximately 10 ft
(3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection
zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle
speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or
higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these
areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT
change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. There-
fore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for
both your vehicle and trailer before making a
lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e.,
bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the
side of your vehicle, this may result in false
detections. The BSM Warning Light may even
remain illuminated the entire time the vehicle is
in a forward gear
Ú page 141.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
SAFETY 165
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience dropouts (blinking on and off) of the
side mirror warning indicator lamps when a
motorcycle or any small object remains at the
side of the vehicle for extended periods of time
(more than a couple of seconds).
The BSM system can become blocked if snow, ice,
mud, or other road contaminations accumulate on
the rear fascia/bumper where the radar sensors
are located. The system may also detect blockage
if the vehicle is operated in areas with extremely
low radar returns such as a desert or parallel to a
large elevation drop. If blockage is detected, a
“Blind Spot Temporarily Unavailable, Wipe Rear
Corners” message will display in the cluster, both
mirror lights will illuminate, and BSM and RCP
alerts will not occur. This is normal operation. The
system will automatically recover and resume
function when the condition clears. To minimize
system blockage, do not block the area of the rear
fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are
located with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.) and keep it clear of road
contaminations.
Sensor Location
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning
Light located in the outside mirrors in addition to
sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the
radio volume
Ú page 167.
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
three different entry points (side, rear, front) while
driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM
system will issue an alert during these types of
zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from
either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
6
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 SAFETY
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side and enter the rear detection zone with
a relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the
vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately
1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated.
If the difference in speed between the two vehicles
is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert
on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts,
walls, foliage, berms, snow banks, car washes, etc.
However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle
in adjacent lanes
Ú page 304.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
to help detect objects in the blind spot zones.
The BSM system is not designed to detect
pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your
vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always
check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
SAFETY 167
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out
of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming
vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and
cautiously out of the parking space until the rear
end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects
moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph
(32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE (R),
the driver is alerted using both the visual and
audible alarms, including reducing the radio
volume.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver. Additionally, if your vehicle is obscured by a
flat object on one side the system can false alert
on vehicles approaching from the opposite
direction.
Blind Spot Modes
Three selectable modes of operation are available
in the Uconnect system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only — Default Setting
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate
side view mirror based on a detected object.
However, when the system is operating in Rear
Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in
the appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. If the turn signal is then activated,
and it corresponds to an alert present on that side
of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be
sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be
issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio
(if on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup
aid system. It is intended to be used to help a
driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking
lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you,
and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
6
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 SAFETY
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/
hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state
always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the
vehicle is started the previously stored mode
will be recalled and used.
The BSM system can work in conjunction with
the KeySense function of the vehicle (if
equipped)
Ú page 87.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with
audible warnings, visual warnings (within the
instrument cluster display), and may apply a brake
jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential
frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking
are intended to provide the driver with enough time
to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
forward collision. When the system determines
that a forward collision is probable, the driver will
be provided with audible and visual warnings and
may provide a brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide
a limited level of active braking to help slow the
vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision.
If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and
the system determines that the driver intends to
avoid the collision by braking but has not applied
sufficient brake force, the system will compensate
and provide additional brake force as required.
If an FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed
below 37 mph (60 km/h), the system may provide
the maximum braking possible to mitigate the
potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision
Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle
completely, the system will hold the vehicle at
standstill for two seconds and then release the
brakes. If a pedestrian is encountered in the path
at the same speed threshold, the system will also
attempt to bring the vehicle to a stop.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated
Ú page 304.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
1 mph (2 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guard rails or sign
posts based on the course prediction. This is
expected and is a part of normal FCW activation
and functionality.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
SAFETY 169
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent
such misuse of the system, after four Active
Braking events within a key cycle, the Active
Braking portion of FCW will be deactivated until
the next key cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent unnec-
essary warnings to the surroundings.
Turning FCW On Or Off
The Forward Collision menu setting is located in
the Uconnect Settings.
NOTE:
The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” deactivates the
system, so no warning or active braking will be
available in case of a possible collision.
NOTE:
The FCW system state is kept in memory from
one key cycle to the next. If the system is turned
off, it will remain off when the vehicle is
restarted.
FCW can work in conjunction with the KeySense
function of the vehicle (if equipped)
Ú page 87.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 141.
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium”
setting and the system status is “Warning &
Braking”. This allows the system to warn the driver
of a possible collision with the vehicle in front using
audible/visual warnings and it applies
autonomous braking.
Changing the FCW status to the “Far” setting
allows the system to warn the driver of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front using audible/
visual warning when the latter is at a farther
distance than the “Medium” setting. This provides
the most reaction time to avoid a possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting
allows the system to warn the driver of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front when the distance
between the vehicle in the front is much closer.
This setting provides less reaction time than the
“Far” and “Medium” settings, which allows for a
more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning”
prevents the system from providing limited
active braking, or additional brake support if the
driver is not braking adequately in the event of
a potential frontal collision, but maintains the
audible and visual warnings.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the
system from providing autonomous braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not
braking adequately in the event of a potential
frontal collision.
The system will retain the last setting selected
by the driver after ignition shut down.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects
not in the path of the vehicle, stationary objects
that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading
vehicles with the same or higher rates of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavail-
able screens.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended
to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW
detect every type of potential collision. The driver
has the responsibility to avoid a collision by
controlling the vehicle via braking and steering.
Failure to follow this warning could lead to
serious injury or death.
6
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 SAFETY
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
momentarily, there may be a condition that limits
FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the
condition that limited the system performance is
no longer present, the system will return to its full
performance state. If the problem persists, see an
authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) —
If Equipped
The Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is a
subsystem of the FCW system that provides the
driver with audible and visual warnings in the
instrument cluster display, and may apply
automatic braking when it detects a potential
frontal collision with a pedestrian/cyclist.
If a PEB event begins at a speed below 37 mph
(60 km/h), the system may provide braking to
mitigate the potential collision with a pedestrian/
cyclist. If the PEB event stops the vehicle
completely, the system will hold the vehicle at a
standstill for two seconds and then release the
brakes. When the system determines a collision
with the pedestrian in front of you is no longer
probable, the warning message will be
deactivated.
The minimum speed for PEB activation is 3 mph
(5 km/h).
Turning PEB On Or Off
NOTE:
The default status of PEB is “On.” This allows the
system to warn you of a possible frontal collision
with the pedestrian.
The PEB button is located in the Uconnect display
in the Controls settings
Ú page 141.
To turn the PEB system off, push the Pedestrian
Emergency Braking OFF button.
To turn the PEB system back on, push the Warning
Active Braking button.
Changing the PEB status to “Off” deactivates the
system, so no warning or active braking will be
available in case of a possible frontal collision with
the pedestrian.
NOTE:
The PEB system will NOT retain the last setting
selected by the driver after ignition shut down. The
system will reset to the default setting when the
vehicle is restarted.
WARNING!
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can
PEB detect every type of potential collision with
a pedestrian. The driver has the responsibility to
avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via
braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
SAFETY 171
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will
warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the
vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
NOTE:
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active
road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will
display a graphic showing the pressure values of
each tire with the low tire pressure values in a
different color, or the Uconnect radio will display a
TPMS message. When this occurs you must
increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS
Warning Light to turn off.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C).
This means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle
is driven. This is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
See
Ú page 282 for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure
warning limit for any reason, including low
temperature effects and natural pressure loss
through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above
the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the
low tire pressure warning (TPMS Warning Light)
illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold placard pressure in order
for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off.
The system will automatically update and the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off once the system
receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a
recommended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the
ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the
tire pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa).
This tire pressure is low enough to turn on the
TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi
(193 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still be
on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light will
turn off only after the tires are inflated to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value
Ú page 304.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in
order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
6
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 SAFETY
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
care and maintenance, or to provide warning of
a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility
to maintain correct tire pressure using an accu-
rate tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination
of the TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual
tire pressure in the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses
wireless technology with wheel rim mounted
electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels.
Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the
valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the
receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
SERVICE TPMS WARNING
When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a
"SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum
of five seconds and then display dashes (--) in
place of the pressure value to indicate which
sensor is not being received.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may
result when using replacement equipment
that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
The TPMS sensor is not designed for use on
aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a
poor overall system performance or sensor
damage. Customers are encouraged to use
OEM wheels to ensure proper TPMS feature
operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended
that you take your vehicle to an authorized
dealer to have your sensor function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the TPMS
sensor.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
SAFETY 173
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system
fault no longer exists, the TPMS Warning Light will
no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message will no longer display, and a pressure
value will display in place of the dashes. A system
fault can occur due to any of the following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPMS sensors
Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings
Using tire chains on the vehicle
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors
Vehicles With Compact Spare — If Equipped
1. The compact spare tire does not have a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the
pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of
a road tire that has a pressure below the
low-pressure warning limit, the “Inflate to XX”
message will continue to be displayed. Upon
the next ignition cycle, the TPMS Warning Light
will remain on and a chime will sound. In
addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster
will still display a different color pressure
value.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then
display dashes (--) in place of the pressure
value.
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime
will sound, the TPMS Warning Light will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid, and the instrument cluster will display a
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place
of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire
and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the
compact spare, the TPMS will update automat-
ically. In addition, the TPMS Warning Light will
turn off and the graphic in the instrument
cluster will display a new pressure value
instead of dashes (--), as long as no tire
pressure is below the low-pressure warning
limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for the TPMS to receive this information.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM LOW
PRESSURE WARNINGS
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in
the instrument cluster and a chime will
sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display an
"Inflate to XX" message and a graphic showing the
pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values in a different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
6
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 SAFETY
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with low pressure
(those in a different color in the instrument cluster
graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value as shown in the "Inflate to
XX" message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will
automatically update, the pressure values in the
graphic display in the instrument cluster will return
to their original color, and the TPMS Warning Light
will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS DEACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) can
be deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire
assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors, such
as when installing winter wheel and tire
assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not
equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime,
the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on. The instrument
cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message and then display dashes (--) in place of
the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS
will no longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message in the instrument cluster but
dashes (--) will remain in place of the pressure
values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with
TPMS sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS
will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then turn off. The
instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message and then display pressure
values in place of the dashes. On the next ignition
cycle the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no
longer be displayed as long as no system fault
exists.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If
you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your passengers
as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured in
the appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear seating
position
Ú page 197.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint
Ú page 197.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
SAFETY 175
(Continued)
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with
your child restraint to make sure that you are
using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow the
front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment
occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully
into the space between occupants and the
door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person,
see
Ú page 301 for customer service contact
information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver,
even on short trips. Someone on the road may be
a poor driver and could cause a collision that
includes you. This can happen far away from home
or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts
reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of
injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind
the driver and outboard front seat
passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
their seat belts. The BeltAlert feature is active
whenever the ignition switch is in the START or
ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime
will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the
START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard
front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
6
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 SAFETY
(Continued)
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when
the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle
speed range and the driver or outboard front seat
passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the
Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning
sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will remain on until the seat belts are
buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence
will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an
animal or other items are placed on the outboard
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat
(if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until the driver and outboard
front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped
with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows
the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely
with you under normal conditions. However, in a
collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk
of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown
out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you
can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be
sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
SAFETY 177
(Continued)
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear their
seat belts whether or not an air bag is also
provided at their seating position to minimize
the risk of severe injury or death in the event
of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder
belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no
matter what their size.
WARNING!
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk
of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces
won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones,
but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap
part of your seat belt as low as possible and
keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop-
erly. In a collision, it could even cut into you.
Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body,
without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat
belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized
dealer immediately and have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest
you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too
far forward, increasing the possibility of injury.
Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision. You
are more likely to hit your head in a collision if
you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap
and shoulder belt are meant to be used
together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a
collision, or if you have questions regarding
seat belt or retractor conditions, take your
vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program
facility for inspection.
WARNING!
6
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back
and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of
the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear
seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat).
Grab the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the seat belt to go around
your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap
belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to
the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is
no longer twisted.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
SAFETY 179
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front and second row outboard seats the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or
downward to position the seat belt away from your
neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to
release the anchorage, and move it up or down to
the position that serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower
position, and if you are taller than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher
position. After you release the anchorage button,
try to move it up or down to make sure that it is
locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature
allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted
in the upward position without pushing or
squeezing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
Second Row Center (If Equipped) And Third
Row Center Seat Belt Operating
Instructions
The second row center (if equipped) and third row
center seat belts feature a seat belt with a
mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows the seat
belt to detach from the lower anchor when the seat
is folded. The mini-latch plate and regular latch
plate can then be stored out of the way in the
headliner for added convenience to open up
utilization of the storage areas behind the front
seats when the seat is not occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch
plate from its stowed position in the headliner
slightly behind the second or third row seat.
Mini-Latch Stowage
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjustments
when the vehicle is stationary.
6
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 SAFETY
2. Grab the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt
over the seat.
Mini-Latch Plate
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the left
head restraint.
Routing The Rear Seat Belt Latch Plate
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Connect Mini-Latch Plate To Mini-Buckle
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up
the webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
Latch Plate And Buckle Connected
1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
2 — Seat Belt Buckle
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
SAFETY 181
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt
in a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that
it is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the
mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular latch
plate into the center red slot on the
mini-buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the
mini-latch plate and regular latch plate into its
stowed position.
Insert Regular Latch Plate Into Mini-Buckle Slot To Detach
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
when the webbing is fully extended and the
adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized
dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender.
The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the
existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different
occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not
properly connected when the seat belt is used
by an occupant, the seat belt will not be able
to provide proper restraint and will increase
the risk of injury in a collision.
When reattaching the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is
not twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow
the preceding procedure to detach the
mini-latch plate and mini-buckle, untwist the
webbing, and reattach the mini-latch plate
and mini-buckle.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original
seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt
Extender if, when worn, the distance between
the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender
buckle and the center of the occupant’s body
is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed
can increase the risk of serious injury or death
in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender
when the lap belt is not long enough and only
use in the recommended seating positions.
Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender
when not needed.
6
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 SAFETY
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of
an accident is reduced for the mother and the
unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips.
Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away
from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt
behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a
collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be
replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. The seat belt system has a retractor
assembly that is designed to release webbing in a
controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child
restraint system
Ú page 207.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for
each seating position.
7 Passenger Bench Seat Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations
7 Passenger Quad Seat Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations (Includes Stow ‘n Go)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
SAFETY 183
8 Passenger Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped with
an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only
pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR
is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the
seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract
completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child
restraint is installed in a seating position that has
a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old
and under should always be properly restrained in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward
until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and
allow it to retract completely to disengage the
Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to
the procedures in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the seat
belt or children who are using booster seats.
The locked mode is only used to install
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints
that have a harness for restraining the child.
6
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 SAFETY
Seat Belt Park Stitch — If Equipped
The rear outboard seat belts may be equipped with
a park stitch to raise the latch plate for easier
access to occupants. If the park stitch interferes
with the tight installation of a child restraint, slide
the latch plate over the stitching to shorten the lap
portion of the belt and install the car seat normally.
When the car seat is removed from the vehicle,
slide the latch plate above the park stitch to enable
occupants to latch the seat belt securely.
Seat Belt Park Stitch Location
Third Row Stow Clip — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a stow clip on
the lower trim behind the third row. This clip is used
to hold the seat belt out of the path of the power
folding third row seat. Only place the seat belt
webbing in this clip while folding and opening the
seat. Do not leave the webbing behind the clip
when using the belt to restrain an occupant.
Third Row Stow Clip
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If
you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in
a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
WARNING!
Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the
third row stow clip when using the seat belt to
restrain an occupant. The seat belt will not be
positioned properly on the occupant and they
could be more seriously injured in an accident
as a result.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
SAFETY 185
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position
or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on
and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system
that may deploy the air bag system even if the
battery loses power or it becomes disconnected
prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight
seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is
first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check,
the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC
detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect
the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the
nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system
is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the igni-
tion switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the
four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In
this condition the air bags may not be ready to
inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS),
the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate on the instrument panel. The
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until
the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been
detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
comes on intermittently or remains on while driving
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately
Ú page 95.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger. The
front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment.
The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
embossed on the air bag covers.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have the
air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the
light does not come on as a bulb check when the
ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start
the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have
an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
6
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 SAFETY
(Continued)
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the severity and
type of collision as determined by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive
information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag deployment.
A low energy output is used in less severe
collisions. A higher energy output is used for more
severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or
front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger seat
belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may
adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air
Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front
Air Bags based upon seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front
passenger Occupant Classification System (OCS)
that is designed to provide Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant’s
seated weight input, as determined by the OCS.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/
Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during front air bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfort-
ably extending your arms to reach the steering
wheel or instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
SAFETY 187
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front
air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front
air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage
by themselves are not good indicators of whether
or not an air bag should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate
and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air
bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of
a Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle.
It is designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant’s seated
weight, as determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists
of the following:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and
Sensor located in the front passenger seat
Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is
located underneath the front passenger seat. The
Sensor is located beneath the passenger seat
cushion foam. Any weight on the seat will be sensed
by the Sensor. The OCM uses input from the Sensor
to determine the front passenger’s most probable
classification. The OCM communicates this
information to the ORC. The ORC may reduce the
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag deployment based on occupant classification.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated
properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the
air bag on the instrument panel or steering
wheel because any such objects could cause
harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe
enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You
may damage the air bags and you could be
injured because the air bags may no longer be
functional. The protective covers for the air
bag cushions are designed to open only when
the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even
though you have air bags.
6
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 SAFETY
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
if the OCS estimates that:
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very light objects on it; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a small passenger, including a child; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing child restraint; or
The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment. Never allow children to ride in the
front passenger seat and never install a child restraint system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status Front Passenger Air Bag Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deployment
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat* Reduced-power deployment OR Full-power deployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment OR reduced-power deployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deployment
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
Children 12 years or younger should always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
SAFETY 189
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. The OCS estimates the
seated weight on the front passenger seat and
where that weight is located. The OCS
communicates the classification status to the ORC.
The ORC uses the classification to determine
whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
inflation rate should be adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated
properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
Properly seated passengers are:
Sitting upright
Facing forward
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet
comfortably on or near the floor
Sitting with their back against the seatback and
the seatback in an upright position
Seated Properly
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small
adult, occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS
may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. This does not mean that
the OCS is working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be
properly positioned on the front passenger seat.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury or
death. The OCS determines the most probable
classification of the occupant that it detects. The
OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or
increased seated weight, which may result in an
adjusted inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not mean that
the OCS is working improperly. Decreasing the
front passenger’s seated weight on the front
passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag. Increasing the front passenger’s seated
weight on the front passenger seat may result in a
full-power deployment of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating
include:
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm
rest or instrument panel).
The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or
turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full
upright position.
The front passenger carries or holds an object
while seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
Objects are lodged under the front passenger
seat.
Objects are lodged between the front passenger
seat and center console.
Accessories that may change the seated weight
on the front passenger seat are attached to the
front passenger seat.
Anything that may decrease or increase the
front passenger’s seated weight.
6
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 SAFETY
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. If an occupant in the front
passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant
may provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different from the occupant’s properly seated
weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
WARNING!
If a child restraint system, child, small teen-
ager or adult in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide
an output signal to the OCS that is different
from the occupant’s properly seated weight
input. This may result in serious injury or death
in a collision.
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly,
with the seatback in an upright position, your
back against the seatback, sitting upright,
facing forward, in the center of the seat, with
your feet comfortably on or near the floor.
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., back-
packs, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front
passenger seat. Holding an object may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different than the occupant’s properly seated
weight input, which may result in serious injury
or death in a collision.
Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from
working properly, which may result in serious
injury or death in a collision. Do not place any
objects on the floor under the front passenger
seat.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
SAFETY 191
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument
panel will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to
classify the front passenger seat status. A
malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation of
the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come on,
or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes
on as you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer for service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
components that may affect the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the
OCS to properly classify the seated weight of a
front seat passenger, the OCS components must
function as designed. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the
seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any
reason, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Only FCA US LLC approved seat accessories may
be used.
The following requirements must be strictly
followed:
Do not modify the front passenger seat
assembly or components in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat
covers or cushions not designated by FCA US
LLC for the specific model being repaired.
Always use the correct seat cover and cushion
specified for the vehicle.
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
At no time should any Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) component or SRS related
component or fastener be modified or replaced
with any part except those which are approved
by FCA US LLC.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees
of the driver and front passenger, and position the
front occupants for improved interaction with the
front air bags.
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger
Knee Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column and a
Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag mounted in
the instrument panel below the glove
compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags
provide enhanced protection during a frontal
impact by working together with the seat belts,
pretensioners, and front air bags.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service proce-
dures to the passenger seat assembly, its
related components, seat cover or cushion
may inadvertently change the air bag deploy-
ment in case of a frontal collision. This could
result in death or serious injury to the front
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a colli-
sion. A modified vehicle may not comply with
required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos,
citizen band radios, etc.
6
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 SAFETY
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
The SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the
outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant
injury during certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the seat
belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The
inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into
the space between the occupant and the door. The
SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a
high force that it could injure occupants if they are
not seated properly, or if items are positioned in
the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side
Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows. The
trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG”
or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the
window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to
injure occupants if they are not belted and seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain side impact events.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the
performance could be adversely affected and/or
objects could be pushed into you, causing
serious injury.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
SAFETY 193
(Continued)
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the severity
and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid
the ORC in determining the appropriate response
to impact events. The system is calibrated to
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not impact
the area of the passenger compartment. The Side
Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal
collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time
than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or
other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering
above the side windows where the SABIC and
its deployment path are located should
remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do
not install any accessory items in your vehicle
which could alter the roof. Do not add an after-
market sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add
roof racks that require permanent attach-
ments (bolts or screws) for installation on the
vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or area
where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appro-
priate) are necessary for your protection in all
collisions. They also help keep you in position,
away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the
best protection from the Side Air Bags, occu-
pants must wear their seat belts properly and
sit upright with their backs against the seats.
Children must be properly restrained in a child
restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
the size of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have Side Air Bags.
WARNING!
6
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 SAFETY
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events. The
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether deployment in a particular rollover event
is appropriate, based on the severity and type of
collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good
indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat
belt pretensioners should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will
not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a
rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is
appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy
the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on
both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain rollover or side impact
events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with electrical Air Bag System Compo-
nents listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli-
sions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent
and normally heal quickly. However, if you
haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or
if you have any blistering, see your doctor imme-
diately.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
SAFETY 195
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal
by-product of the process that generates the
non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These
airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes,
nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles
settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision,
the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken
to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event, the
ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System perform the following
functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
Cut off battery power to the electric motor
(if equipped).
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as
long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes
from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any
of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump (if equipped)
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners
cannot protect you in another collision. Have the
air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat
belt retractor assemblies replaced by an
authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the
Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced
as well.
6
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 SAFETY
(Continued)
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to
the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
from the ignition switch to avoid draining the
battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in
the engine compartment and on the ground near
the engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine. If
there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle
electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an
accident, reset the system by following the
procedure described below. If you have any doubt,
contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response
System functions after an event, the ignition switch
must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN
to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel
leaks in the engine compartment and on the
ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the
engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after
performing the reset procedure, the vehicle must
be towed to an authorized dealer to be inspected
and to have the Enhanced Accident Response
System reset.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You
could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to protect you. Do not modify the compo-
nents or wiring, including adding any kind of
badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub
trim cover or the upper passenger side of the
instrument panel. Do not modify the front
fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or add
aftermarket side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone
who works on your vehicle that it has an air
bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air
bag system. The air bag may inflate acciden-
tally or may not function properly if modifica-
tions are made. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for any air bag system
service. If your seat, including your trim cover
and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer
approved seat accessories may be used. If it is
necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
WARNING!
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
SAFETY 197
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such
data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were oper-
ating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender,
age, and crash location) are recorded. However,
other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or
the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at
all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you
can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to
crash statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost
large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check
the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you
have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read
and follow all the instructions and warnings in the
child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the
labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that
it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable
Safety Standards. You should also make sure that
you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become
a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required
to hold even an infant on your lap could become
so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for
the child’s size.
6
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 SAFETY
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who
have not reached the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the
vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat
belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
SAFETY 199
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children
should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a
harness for as long as possible, up to the highest
weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s
seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with
knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while
the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The
child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in
the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear
support leg in this vehicle. The floor of this
vehicle is not designed to manage the crash
forces of this type of car seat. In a crash, the
support leg may not function as it was designed
by the car seat manufacturer, and your child may
be more severely injured as a result.
6
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 SAFETY
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long
enough to bend over the front of the seat when
their back is against the seatback, should use the
seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test
to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s
seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the
back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat while the child is
still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole
trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder
belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure
the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming
or slouching can move the belt out of position. If
the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move
the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in
a collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward
or rearward because it can loosen the child
restraint attachments. Remove the child
restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat
position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure
it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH
anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do
not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden
stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
or seatbacks and cause serious personal
injury.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly,
which may result in serious injury or death. A
child must always wear both the lap and
shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
SAFETY 201
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for
installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are
two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seating
position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the
vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may
have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages.
In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
used with the top tether anchorage to install the
child restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
6
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 SAFETY
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
7 Passenger Bench Seat LATCH Positions
7 Passenger Quad Seating LATCH Positions
(Includes Stow ‘n Go)
8 Passenger LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(Two Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(Two Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(Two Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
SAFETY 203
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes with the installation of the child restraint, the head restraint may be folded and the child seat installed in
front of it.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and
the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor
instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a
rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach
a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed by the
booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for more
information.
Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the
center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the
seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using
the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s
manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The 2nd row head restraints on bench and the center head restraint in the 8
passenger vehicle can be removed if they interfere with the installation of the
child restraint. 2nd row Stow 'n Go head restraints are not removable. The
3rd row center head restraint is removable in all vehicles, but the 3rd row
outboard head restraints are not removable
Ú page 44.
6
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 SAFETY
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback,
below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean into
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown)
7 Passenger Stow ‘n Go Seating
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown)
8 Passenger Seating
LATCH Anchorages
(Second Row Bench Anchorages Shown)
7 Passenger Bench Seating
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its
upright position when the seat is to be used by
an occupant who is not in a child restraint.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury or
death in a collision.
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
SAFETY 205
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages
located behind all second row seating
positions. The third row has a tether
anchor on the 40% seat for the right
outboard position and in the center of the 60%
seat for either the center or left outboard seating
position. All tether anchorages are located on the
back of the seat, near the floor.
Tether Strap Anchorages
(Second Row Bench Anchorage Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages
(Second Row 7 Passenger Stow ‘n Go Anchorage Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages
(Second Row 8 Passenger Anchorage Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages
(Third Row 60/40 Anchorage Shown)
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach
to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the
connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child
restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will
also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether
strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the
top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
6
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 SAFETY
Center Seat LATCH
This vehicle has 4 lower LATCH anchorages in the
third row, rear seat. Anchorages A and B are used
for the right outboard position behind the front
passenger (1). Anchorages C and D are used for
the center seating position (2). The left outboard
position (3) does not have lower anchorages. Do
not
install a child restraint using anchorages B and
C. This is not a LATCH position in your vehicle.
Center Seat LATCH Positions
If a child restraint installed in the center position
blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the
outboard position, do not use that outboard
position. If a child seat in the center position blocks
the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not
install a child seat in that outboard position.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as
described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow
the seat belt, following the instructions below. See
Ú page 207 to check what type of seat belt each
seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap of the child seat so that
you can more easily attach the hooks or
connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child
seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in the
selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect
it to the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 211 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the
seat. Remove slack in the straps according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
WARNING!
Use anchorages C and D to install a
LATCH-compatible child restraint in the center
seating position (2). Do not install a
LATCH-compatible child restraint using
anchorages B and C. This is not a
LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. Please
see
Ú page 206 for typical installation
instructions.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
SAFETY 207
(Continued)
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install
a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
being used by other occupants or being used to
secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure
a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the
seat belt retractor. Before installing a child
restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap
portion of the seat belt tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking
clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a
locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract back
into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make
a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor.
See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
Ú page 182 for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
WARNING!
6
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
7 Passenger Bench Seat Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations
7 Passenger Quad Seat Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations (Includes Stow ‘n Go)
8 Passenger Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of
the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with
the seat belt to attach a forward facing child
restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat
belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of the child
restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of
the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the
child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
SAFETY 209
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint inter-
feres with the installation of the child restraint, the
head restraint may be folded and the child seat
installed in front of it.
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The 2nd row head restraints on bench and the
center head restraint in the 8 passenger vehicle
can be removed if they interfere with the
installation of the child restraint. 2nd row Stow 'n
Go head restraints are not removable. The 3rd row
center head restraint is removable in all vehicles,
but the 3rd row outboard head restraints are not
removable
Ú page 44.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat
belt against the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position
with an ALR retractor.
Frequently Asked Questions
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its
upright position when the seat is to be used by
an occupant who is not in a child restraint.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury or
death in a collision.
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
6
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to
make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in
the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
part of the belt until you have pulled all the
seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then,
allow the webbing to retract back into the
retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear
a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it
is locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat
step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and
the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
Ú page 211 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Seat Belt Park Stitch — If Equipped
The rear outboard seat belts may be equipped with
a park stitch to raise the latch plate for easier
access to occupants. If the park stitch interferes
with the tight installation of a child restraint, slide
the latch plate over the stitching to shorten the lap
portion of the belt and install the car seat following
the steps above. When the car seat is removed
from the vehicle, slide the latch plate above the
park stitch to enable occupants to latch the
seatbelt securely.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
SAFETY 211
Seat Belt Park Stitch Location
If the park stitch interferes with the lock-off
features of the child restraint, do not use the
lock-off feature. Instead, switch the seat belt to the
locking mode, as described in the steps above or
move the car seat to a different seating position.
Seat Belt Park Stitch
Installing Child Restraints Using the Top
Tether Anchorage
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
Top Tether Anchorage Locations — 2nd Row Bench
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car
seat to any location in front of the car seat,
including the seat frame or a tether anchorage.
Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car
seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for
that seating position, located behind the top of
the vehicle seat. See
Ú page 201 for the
location of approved tether anchorages in your
vehicle.
6
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 SAFETY
Top Tether Anchorage Locations — 2nd Row 8 Passenger
Top Tether Anchorage Locations — 3rd Row
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped
with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the
head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower
the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown
in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Top Tether Anchorage Location — 2nd Row 7 Passenger
Stow ‘n Go Anchorage
Third Row Tether Attachment
The tether anchorage found on the back of the
60% seat in the third row may be used by either the
left outboard or the center seating position. Only
tether one child restraint to the tether anchorage
at a time.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible
injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
position directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip
into the opening between the seatbacks as
you remove slack in the strap.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
SAFETY 213
To connect the tether strap hook to the tether
anchorage for either seating position on the 60%
third row seat:
1. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat.
2. If the car seat is in the center, raise the center
head restraint and route the tether strap
around the inboard (left) side of the head
restraint support posts, as shown in the
diagram.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown
in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Center Tether Attachment – 3rd Row
Outboard Tether Attachments – 3rd Row
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
Do not connect the tether strap for more than
one child restraint to the tether anchorage on
the 60% seat in the third row. This anchorage is
intended for one child restraint at a time.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
sion, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
6
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 SAFETY
(Continued)
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about
and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during
panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you
have questions regarding seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check
when the ignition switch is first placed in
the ON/RUN mode. If the light is either
not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an
authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the
bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has
been detected. It will stay on until the fault is
removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 174.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should
be able to feel the air directed against the
windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if
your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the
operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals. Only use a floor mat that is securely
attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot
slip out of position and interfere with the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and
cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor
mat using the floor mat fasteners.
DO NOT install your floor mat upside
down or turn your floor mat over.
Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the
floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
SAFETY 215
(Continued)
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or
other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall.
Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect
sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the
lug nut/bolt torque for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should
be located and corrected immediately.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING
FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other floor mat.
NEVER install or stack an additional
floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot
be properly attached and secured to your
vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced,
only use a FCA approved floor mat for the
specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for interfer-
ence, with the vehicle properly parked with the
engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the
brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to
check for interference. If your floor mat inter-
feres with the operation of any pedal, or is not
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from
the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
WARNING!
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
into the driver’s side floor area when the
vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
change the position of the floor mat and may
cause interference with the accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to
the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are
secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress
each pedal to check for interference with the
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then
re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap and
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
always check your floor mat has been properly
installed and is secured to your vehicle using
the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING!
6
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 SAFETY
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside
or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have an
authorized dealer inspect the complete exhaust
system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust
system each time the vehicle is raised for
lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to
move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/lift-
gate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running, adjust your heating or
cooling controls to force outside air into the
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent
carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a
closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in
a parked vehicle with the engine running for
an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in
an open area with the engine running for more
than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the
vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system
inspected every time the vehicle is raised.
Have any abnormal conditions repaired
promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
217
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located in
the lower center area of the instrument panel.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the button is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the button
a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should
not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it
when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers
may wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an SOS
and ASSIST button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber
Ú page 304.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if
you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network, which comes as a
built in function. Other Uconnect services will
only be operable if your SiriusXM Guardian™
service is active and you are connected to an
operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network.
1 — SOS Button
2 — ASSIST Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
7
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and you
will be connected to a representative for assis-
tance. Roadside Assistance will know what
vehicle is being driven and its location. Addi-
tional fees may apply for roadside assistance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle
support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for
Radio, Phone and NAV issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview
Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call
system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel
the SOS Call connection, push the SOS call button
on the Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation
button on the Device Screen. Termination of the
SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the
Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the SOS and
ASSIST buttons on the Rearview Mirror will
turn green once a connection to a SOS
operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a
SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system
may transmit the following important vehicle
information to a SOS operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a SOS
Call
The vehicle brand
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system to
determine if additional assistance is needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open
a voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
mine if additional assistance is needed.
Once the SOS operator opens a voice
connection with the vehicle’s SOS Call
system, the operator should be able to
speak with you or other vehicle occupants
and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle.
The vehicle’s SOS Call system will attempt
to remain connected with the SOS operator
until the SOS operator terminates the
connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road
conditions or location), do not wait for voice
contact from an Emergency Services Agent. All
occupants should exit the vehicle immediately
and move to a safe location.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 219
(Continued)
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico
may not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any
of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The Rearview Mirror light located between the
SOS and ASSIST buttons will continuously illumi-
nate red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle
device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent
or stop the SOS Call system operation. These
include, but are not limited to, the following
factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware
are damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable network and GPS antennas. You
could prevent operable network and GPS
signal reception, which can prevent your
vehicle from placing an emergency call. An
operable network and GPS signal reception is
required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add after-
market electrical equipment to the vehicle’s
electrical system. This may prevent your
vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an
emergency call. To avoid interference that can
cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile
radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the
antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE
LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON
(INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to fail
when you need it. You could be injured if the
air bag system is not there to help protect you.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean
you will not have SOS Call services. If the Rear-
view Mirror light is illuminated, have an autho-
rized dealer service the SOS Call system
immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns
on the air bag Warning Light on the instrument
panel if a malfunction in any part of the
system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning
Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service the Occupant Restraint Control system
immediately.
WARNING!
7
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavail-
able or obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
congestion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which can
prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)
network connection and a GPS signal is
required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that
can immediately connect you with help in the event
that your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to
your provided radio supplement for complete
information.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING —
IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto
the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth
and wipe the mirror clean.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid the danger of
being hit when operating the jack or changing
the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on
you. You could be crushed. Never put any part
of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack.
If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take
it to a service center where it can be raised on
a lift.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 221
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid
ice or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Place the ignition in OFF mode.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when
the vehicle is being lifted or raised.
JACK AND SPARE TIRE LOCATION
The jacking tools, spare tire and portable air
compressor (if equipped) or tire service kit (if
equipped) are stowed behind an access panel on
the left hand side of the vehicle.
Jacking Equipment Location
EQUIPMENT REMOVAL
1. Remove the access panel to the jacking
equipment.
2. Unlatch the Portable Air Compressor or Tire
Service Kit if equipped. Unscrew the wing nut
that is holding the Inflatable Spare Tire and
gently remove it from the storage area.
Remove wrench from foam tray.
NOTE:
Depending on the trim level of the vehicle, the
options for spare tire equipment may vary.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
7
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jacking Equipment
Jacking Equipment
Jacking Equipment
3. Remove Jack by turning the jack screw
counterclockwise to collapse from storage
area that is located behind the tire.
Jack Location
1 — Inflatable Spare Tire
2 — Tire Service Kit
3 — Wrench
4 — Fuel Filler Funnel
1 — Inflatable Spare Tire
2 — Portable Air Compressor
1 — Inflatable Spare Tire
2 — Portable Air Compressor
1 — Jack Screw
2 — Jack
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 223
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
Jack Warning Label
Detailed information about the inflatable spare
tire, its use, and operation can be found on
Ú page 287.
Extending The Wrench
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug
nuts by turning them to the left, one turn while
the wheel is still on the ground.
2. There are two jack engagement locations on
each side of the vehicle body. These locations
are on the sill flange of the vehicle body.
NOTE:
Placement for the front and rear jacking locations
are critical. See below images for proper jacking
locations.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before
raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel
to be raised.
Do not let any passenger sit in the vehicle
when it is on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be
raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
7
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jack Locations Front Lifting Point
Front Jack Location
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on
you. You could be crushed. Never get any part of
your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you
need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 225
3. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn
clockwise until the jack head is properly
engaged in the described location. Do not
raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
securely engaged.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw
clockwise, using the swivel wrench. Raise the
vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface
and enough clearance is obtained to install the
compact spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides
maximum stability.
5. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with
wheel covers, remove the cover from the
wheel by hand. Do not pry the wheel cover off.
Then pull the wheel off the hub.
6. Install the inflatable spare on the vehicle,
located in the rear cargo area of the vehicle.
Mounting Inflatable Spare Tire
NOTE:
Do not install the wheel cover on the inflatable
spare tire.
7. Leave the vehicle on the jack and start
inflating the inflatable spare after the tire has
been mounted to the vehicle. Secure the
wheel to the hub by tightening the nuts with
the wrench. After inflation, once the vehicle is
lowered you will have a second opportunity to
“torque” the lug nuts
Ú page 295.
8. Inflate the tire to the prescribed pressure
60 psi (4.2 Bar) using the Portable Air
Compressor
Ú page 227 or Tire Service Kit if
equipped Ú page 228.
9. Lower the vehicle once the inflatable Spare
has reached its pressure and the
compressor-hose has been removed from the
tire valve.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle for
increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a
star pattern until each nut has been tightened
twice
Ú page 295. If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by an authorized dealer or at a
service station.
11. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the
jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle
only enough to remove the tire.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the inflatable spare tire with
the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could
be damaged if the inflatable spare tire is
mounted incorrectly.
7
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
12. Place the deflated (flat) tire and foam tray
cover assembly in the rear cargo area. Do not
stow the deflated tire in the inflatable spare
tire location. Have the full-sized tire repaired or
replaced, as soon as possible.
13. Stow the jack back in the stowage
compartment and place the access panel
back. The stud of the storage area must be
threaded through the lower part of the jack.
Then turn the Jack Screw clockwise to secure
it in place.
NOTE:
Stow the foam tray and components in the cargo
area.
Storing The Jack
ROAD TIRE INSTALLATION
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel
wheels with wheel covers, install two lug nuts
on the mounting studs which are on each side
of the valve stem. Install the lug nuts with the
cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with
the valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover
by hand, snapping the cover over the two lug
nuts. Do not use a hammer or excessive force
to install the cover.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
spare tire in the places provided. Have the
deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
1 — Jack Screw
2 — Jack
3 — Stud
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Road Tire
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Wheel Lug Nut
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 227
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone
shaped end of the nut toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten all the lug nuts until the wheel
sits flush onto the hub and there is no play. The
nuts will have to be fully tightened once the
vehicle is lowered. Tightening an improperly
seated wheel under vehicle load can damage
the threads, cause vibration, and undermine
safety.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the
jack handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle for
increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a
star pattern until each nut has been tightened
twice. Details for proper wheel lug nut torque
Ú page 295. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by an authorized dealer or at a service
station.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all
lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel.
PORTABLE AIR COMPRESSOR —
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Portable Air
Compressor. Use the Portable Air Compressor
located in the side compartment of the cargo area
to inflate the inflatable tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar).
Portable Air Compressor
Portable Air Compressor Usage With Inflatable
Spare Tire
1. Remove the Portable Air Compressor from the
storage location.
2. Raise the vehicle as described in
the Jacking Instructions within this
section.
3. Install the Inflatable Spare tire as
described in the Jack Instructions
section in this manual. Make sure
that the valve stem is located near
the ground, and then screw the air hose of the
Portable Air Compressor to the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the power plug and
connect it the vehicles 12 Volt
power Outlet.
5. Always start the engine before
turning ON the Portable Air
Compressor.
6. Switch the power button ON.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
1 — Power Plug
2 — Deflation Button
3 — Pressure Gauge
4 — Power Button
5 — Air Hose
7
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
7. Inflate the tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar)
recommended as per the label on
the wheel or if the vehicle equipped
with the inflatable spare tire
pressure indicated on the Tire and Loading
information label located on the driver-side
door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire is overinflated, use the deflation button
to reduce the tire air pressure.
8. After the tire reaches the
recommended pressure, lower the
vehicle with the jack as described in
the Jack Instructions section in this
manual.
9. Remove the speed limit label
sticker from the Portable Air
Compressor and place it on the
center of the steering wheel.
10. Return the Portable Air Compressor to the
foam tray and secure it with the strap. Store
the foam tray in the cargo area.
RETURN INFLATABLE SPARE TIRE
To return Inflatable Spare Tire to its storage
location.
1. Return the Jack.
2. Deflate the spare tire. Use the Tire Service Kit
or Portable Air Compressor
Ú page 227 and
push the deflation button to do this step. See
the Portable Air Compressor in this section for
additional information. The inflatable spare
tire will return to its original shape.
3. Install the inflatable spare tire back into its
original stowage location and position facing
outward.
4. Install the foam tray with wrench and funnel
installed.
5. Install and tighten the wing nut by hand.
6. Install the Tire Service Kit or Portable Air
Compressor (if equipped) and tighten the
strap.
7. Install access panel door.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Service
Kit. Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the
tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit.
Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be
removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be used
in outside temperatures down to approximately
-4°F (-20°C). This kit will provide a temporary tire
seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to
100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING!
Do not lift or carry the Portable Air Compressor
by the hose.
Always stow the Portable Air Compressor only
in the provided place.
The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get
hot after use, so it should be handled care-
fully.
Keep the Portable Air Compressor away from
open flames or heat source.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 229
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is secured with a strap and is
stored in the storage bin located behind the rear
cargo trim panel.
Tire Service Kit Location
Tire Service Kit
Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Components
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and
turn to this position for air pump oper-
ation only.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and
turn to this position to inject the Tire
Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the
tire.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button
once to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
Push and release the Power Button
again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to reduce
the air pressure in the tire if it
becomes overinflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle prior
to the expiration date (printed at the lower right
hand corner on the bottle label) to ensure
optimum operation of the system. See the
Sealant Bottle Replacement in this section for
further information.
1 — Tire Service Kit
2 — Fuel Funnel
1 — Sealant/Air Hose
2 — Hose Accessories
3 — Mode Select Knob
4 — Pressure Gauge
5 — Deflation Button
6 — Power Switch
7 — Sealant Bottle
8 — Power Plug
7
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use
and needs to be replaced after each use. Always
replace these components immediately at your
original equipment vehicle dealer.
When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid
form, clean water, and a damp cloth will remove
the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel
components. Once the sealant dries, it can
easily be peeled off and properly discarded.
For optimum performance, make sure the valve
stem on the wheel is free of debris before
connecting the Tire Service Kit.
The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to
seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diam-
eter in the tread/contact surface of your
vehicle’s tires.
The Tire Service Kit Sealant is not intended to
seal punctures on the tires' side walls.
You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to
inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two
needles, located in the Accessory Storage
Compartment (on the bottom of the air pump)
for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflat-
able items. However, use only the Air Pump and
make sure the Mode Select Knob is in the Air
Mode when inflating such items to avoid
injecting sealant into them.
Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the
hoses.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
using the Tire Service Kit.
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is approxi-
mately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving
with extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving on
a flat tire.
If the wheel has any damage.
If you are unsure of the condition of the
tire or the wheel.
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames
or heat source.
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire
Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passen-
gers, and others around you.
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire
Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes,
or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful
if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the
skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irrita-
tion. Flush immediately with plenty of water if
there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change
clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains
latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire
Service Kit out of reach of children. If swal-
lowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of
water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce
vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
WARNING!
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 231
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the
vehicle’s Hazard Warning Flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with
the deflated tire) is in a position that is near to
the ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit
Hose to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire
Service Kit flat on the ground. This will provide
the best positioning of the kit when injecting
the sealant into the deflated tire and running
the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to
place the valve stem in this position before
proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (P) and cycle
the ignition in the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the
cap from the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on
the ground next to the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then
screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose
onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert
the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt
power outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated
Tire:
1. Always start the vehicle before
turning the Tire Service Kit on.
2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob is to
the Sealant Mode position.
3. After pushing the Power Button,
the sealant (white fluid) will flow from
the Sealant Bottle through the
Sealant Hose and into the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 –
10 seconds through the Sealant Hose:
1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire Service
Kit off. Disconnect the Sealant Hose from the
valve stem. Make sure the valve stem is free
of debris. Reconnect the Sealant Hose to the
valve stem. Check that the Mode Select Knob
is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air
Mode. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire
Service Kit on.
2. Connect the Power Plug to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle,
if available. Make sure the vehicle is running
before turning the Tire Service Kit on.
3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to
previous use. Call for assistance.
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose:
1. Continue to operate the pump
until sealant is no longer flowing
through hose (typically takes
30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant
flows through the Sealant Hose, the Pressure
Gauge can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar).
The Pressure Gauge will decrease quickly
from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the
actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle
is empty.
7
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. The pump will start to inject air into
the tire immediately after the
Sealant Bottle is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire
to the cold tire inflation pressure found on the
tire and loading information label located in
the driver-side door opening. Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge.
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi
(1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or
is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within
15 minutes:
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
1. Push the Power Button to turn the
Tire Service Kit off.
2. Remove the speed limit label from
the Tire Service Kit and place sticker
on the steering wheel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose
from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the
fitting at the end of the hose, and place the Tire
Service Kit in the vehicle storage location.
Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and
inflating the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles
(8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant
within the tire. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location and turn on the
vehicle’s Hazard Warning Flashers.
Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the
ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose
to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire
Service Kit flat on the ground. This will provide
the best positioning of the kit when injecting the
sealant into the deflated tire and running the air
pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place
the valve stem in this position before
proceeding.
Place the transmission in PARK (P) and cycle the
ignition in the OFF position.
Apply the parking brake.
NOTE:
If tire has improper inflation follow the steps below
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove the
cap from the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on
the ground next to the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem, and then
screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose
onto the valve stem.
WARNING!
The Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire
repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or
replaced after using the Tire Service Kit. Do not
exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is
repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around
you. Have the tire checked as soon as possible
at an authorized dealer.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 233
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert
the plug into the vehicle's 12 Volt
power outlet.
5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the
fitting at the end of the hose onto the
valve stem.
6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and
turn to the Air Mode position.
7. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the
Pressure Gauge.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button to turn on
Tire Service Kit and inflate the tire to
the cold tire inflation pressure found
on the tire and loading information
label located in the driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve
stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem and
unplug from 12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage
area in the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or
replaced at the earliest opportunity at an
authorized dealer or tire service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the
steering wheel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been
sealed using the Tire Service Kit.
Sealant Bottle Replacement:
1. Unwrap the power cord.
2. Unwrap the hose.
Hose Location
3. Remove the bottle cover.
Remove The Bottle Cover
7
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to release.
Rotate The Bottle Up
5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor.
Remove The Bottle
NOTE:
For sealant bottle installation, follow these
steps reverse order.
Replacement sealant bottles are available at
authorized service centers.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a
battery in another vehicle or by using a portable
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be
dangerous if done improperly so please follow the
procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located on the left
side of the engine compartment.
Battery Location
NOTE:
The positive battery post may be covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to
the positive battery post. Do not jump off fuses.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system voltage
greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery,
starter motor, alternator or electrical system may
occur.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 235
(Continued)
Only jump directly off positive post which has a
positive (+) symbol on or around the post.
See below steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK (P) and place the
ignition to OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective cap
over the remote positive (+) battery post.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, set the parking brake and make
sure the ignition is OFF.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the remote positive (+)
post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post
(exposed metallic/unpainted post of the
discharge vehicle) near the windshield cowl.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the discon-
necting procedure below.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be
injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn
your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas
which is flammable and explosive. Keep open
flames or sparks away from the battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster
vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting
electrical spark could cause the battery to
explode and could result in personal injury.
7
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the jumper
cable from the remote negative post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster
battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post
of the vehicle with the discharged battery and
reinstall the protective cap.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and charging
system inspected at an authorized dealer.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel for
a Cap-Less Fuel System
Ú page 221. If refueling is
necessary, while using an approved gas can, insert
the refueling funnel into the filler neck opening.
Take care to open both flappers with the funnel to
avoid spills.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on
the fuel door to break the ice buildup. Then push
on the rear center edge of the fuel door to
re-release. Do not pry on the door.
Refueling Funnel
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A
funnel is provided to allow emergency refueling
with a gas can.
See below steps for refueling:
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage
area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as
the fuel nozzle.
Inserting Funnel
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough without
engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 237
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper
doors open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior
to putting back in the spare tire storage area.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be
serviced by an authorized dealer.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce
the potential for overheating by taking the
appropriate action.
On the highway — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase
engine idle speed.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The
A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling
system and turning the A/C off can help remove
this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the heater
core to act as a supplement to the radiator and
aids in removing heat from the engine cooling
system.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or
the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place fuel
containers on the ground while filling.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
If you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator
has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator or
coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”,
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the
pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine off
immediately, and call for service.
7
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
To move the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as
a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is
available.
Manual Park Release Access Cover
Follow These Steps To Activate The Manual Park
Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while
seated in the driver’s seat.
2. Apply the parking brake, if possible.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
remove the Manual Park Release access
cover, which is to the lower left of the steering
column.
4. The Manual Park Release access cover is
connected to a red tether strap. Pull the tether
strap out as far as it will go, then release it. The
transmission should now be in NEUTRAL (N),
allowing the vehicle to be moved.
Tether Strap
NOTE:
When the lever is locked in the released position,
the tether will remain outside of the trim panel and
the access cover cannot be reinstalled.
5. Release the parking brake only when the
vehicle is securely connected to a tow vehicle.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while
seated in the driver’s seat.
2. Pull the tether strap out again, then release it.
3. Allow the tether to retract with the lever back
to its original position.
4. Verify that the transmission is in PARK (P).
5. Confirm that the tether has retracted fully
and re-install the access cover. If the access
cover cannot be re-installed, repeat steps 1
through 4.
WARNING!
You should be seated in the driver’s seat with
your foot firmly placed on the brake pedal to
maintain control of the vehicle before activating
the Manual Park Release. If possible, you should
apply the parking brake. Activating the Manual
Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if
it is not secured or properly connected to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on
an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious
injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 239
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Then shift
back and forth between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE
(R) while gently pressing the accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or
less. Whenever the transmission remains in
NEUTRAL (N) for more than two seconds, you must
press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or
REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion
without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial Off”
mode, before rocking the vehicle
Ú page 160.
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF
button again to restore “ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and
tires. A tire could explode and injure someone.
Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when
you are stuck and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
lead to transmission overheating and failure.
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every
five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize
overheating and reduce the risk of transmis-
sion failure during prolonged efforts to free a
stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or
drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too
fast may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not
spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)
while in gear (no transmission shifting
occurring).
7
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following
equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle,
not to fascia/bumper or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
NOTE:
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is disabled before towing this vehicle (if rear wheels are on the ground), to avoid inadvertent Electric Park
Brake (EPB) engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.
Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electrical failure when the Electric Park Brake (EPB) is engaged, will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear
wheels off the ground when moving the vehicle onto a flatbed.
Towing Condition Wheel OFF The Ground ALL MODELS
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 241
(Continued)
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle
must be towed with the front wheels OFF the
ground (using a towing dolly, or wheel lift
equipment with the front wheels raised).
NOTE:
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released,
and remains released, while being towed.
Vehicle Recovery Tow Points
Your vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Recovery
Points that can be used to recover a disabled
vehicle, located on the underbody of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Ensure that the towing service tow hooks are
properly seated and secured in the attachment
points.
This recovery tow feature should be used by a
trained professional only.
Use approved receptacle location to free the
disabled vehicle from its environment.
Front Recovery Points
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
Recovery feature:
Is to be used by a professional ONLY.
Is used only to provide recovery of the vehicle.
Is NOT to be used to recover secondary
vehicle.
Is NOT to be used for transporting the vehicle
over the road, i.e. “Flat Towing”.
Is to be used by a professional ONLY.
Is used only to provide recovery of the vehicle.
Is NOT to be used to recover secondary
vehicle.
Is NOT to be used for transporting the vehicle
over the road, i.e. “Flat Towing”.
7
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode.
NOTE:
The Safehold feature will engage the Electric Park
Brake whenever the driver's door is opened (if the
ignition is ON, transmission is not in PARK, and
brake pedal is released). If you are towing this
vehicle with the ignition in the ON/RUN mode, you
must manually disable the Electric Park Brake
each time the driver's door is opened, by pressing
the brake pedal and then releasing the EPB.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's battery
is discharged, detailed instructions on shifting the
transmission out of PARK in order to move the
vehicle
Ú page 238.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
takes effect in the event of an impact
Ú page 195.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle
Ú page 196.
Recovery load should:
Be applied at constant speed.
Be applied parallel to the center line of the
length of the vehicle.
Not be an abrupt acceleration.
Be applied at constant speed.
Be applied parallel to the center line of the
length of the vehicle.
Not be an abrupt acceleration.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck,
do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may
result from improper towing.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remains released, while being
towed.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
243
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change indicator
system will remind you that it is time to take your
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips,
trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient
temperatures will influence when the “Oil Change
Required” message is displayed. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled
oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed
by someone other than an authorized dealer
Ú page 86.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet
customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear
or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irreg-
ular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indi-
cator system turns on.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir
and brake master cylinder, fill as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
8
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the Maintenance Plan for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions. If required, replace engine air cleaner filter.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 245
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends, and replace
if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Inspect front accessory drive tensioner, idler pulley, and
replace if necessary.
X
8
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 mi (19,000 km).
Replace spark plugs.
1
X
Replace the front accessory drive belt. X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
Replace PCV valve. X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only; yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have
any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could
cause an accident.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 247
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L ENGINE
1 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 5 — Windshield Washer Reservoir Cap
2 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 6 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Battery
8
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil
must be maintained at the correct level. Check the
oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel
stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is
about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine
is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low
end of the range and MAX at the high end of the
range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the
MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is at
the low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil
level to the high end of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the
engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid
level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not
radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a
few seconds to flush out the residual washer fluid.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
some washer fluid, apply it to a cloth or towel, and
wipe clean the wiper blades; this will help blade
performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture
that meets or exceeds the temperature range of
your climate. This rating information can be found
on most washer fluid containers.
MAINTENANCE -FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free
battery. You will never have to add water, and
periodic maintenance is not required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could
damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or
working around the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or
on skin, flush the area immediately with large
amounts of water
Ú page 234.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not
use a booster battery or any other booster
source with an output greater than 12 Volts.
Do not allow cable clamps to touch each
other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
hands after handling.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 249
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in
civil penalties being assessed against you.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
Ú page 299.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified
by the API. The manufacturer only recommends API
trademark oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies
0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40
and 5W-40 engine oil.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is attached
to the positive post and the negative cable is
attached to the negative post. Battery posts
are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and
are identified on the battery case. Cable
clamps should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is
in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery
cables before connecting the charger to the
battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide
starting voltage.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the pressures
generated by these machines is such that
complete protection against water ingress
cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper
equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle
to a competent mechanic.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as
the chemicals can damage your engine. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
8
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils,
only use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
correct API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity
grade numbers should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
the addition of any additives (other than leak
detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine
oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil
filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a
problem to the environment. Contact an
authorized dealer, service station or governmental
agency for advice on how and where used oil and
oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new
filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used
for replacement. The quality of replacement filters
varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar®
certified filters should be used.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 244.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified
filters should be used.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the
case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless
such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle
with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive
belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could be
injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or around
a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equip-
ment. If you have any doubt about your ability
to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a
competent mechanic.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 251
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across the ribbed surface of a belt
from rib to rib, are considered normal. These are
not a reason to replace belt. However, cracks
running along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any
belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also, have the belt replaced if it has
excessive wear, frayed cords, or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated
from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking
(cracks between two ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
Belt broken
NOTE:
Identify and correct problem before new belt is
installed
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble
is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation).
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools; we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized
dealer at the start of each warm season. This
service should include cleaning of the condenser
fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension
should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for your
air conditioning system. Some unapproved
refrigerants are flammable and can explode,
injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or
lubricants can cause the system to fail,
requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty
Information located online, for further
warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines
to be disconnected should be done by an
experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
8
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
Hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. It is recommended that
air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the
following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Remove all contents from the glove
compartment.
Glove Compartment
2. Open the glove compartment door partially,
leaving extra slack on the glove compartment
tension tether. Detach the glove compartment
tension tether by sliding the black tension
tether clip down, and popping it out of the slot
on the side of the glove compartment door.
3. There are glove compartment travel stops on
either side of the glove compartment door. To
release them, push inward on each travel stop,
and pull the glove compartment door down
until the travel stops pass clear of their
hooking points.
4. Open the glove compartment door as far as
possible to gain access to the cabin air filter
compartment cover.
Cabin Air Filter Compartment Cover
5. Pry up the lid of each individual compartment
snap, and detach it from the rest of the snap.
There is a small space on the side of each
snap to use for separating the lid from the
snap. Once detached, remove the rest of the
snap completely from the compartment cover.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air filter
removed and the blower operating, the blower
can contact hands and may propel dirt and
debris into your eyes, resulting in personal injury.
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether Clip
1 — Compartment Cover
2 — Compartment Snap
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 253
6. After removing the snaps, lift up the
compartment cover to gain access to the fresh
air inlet.
Cabin Air Filter Cover
7. Remove the filter cover by prying back each of
the retaining tabs from their hooking points,
and then pulling the filter cover out to expose
the cabin air filter. Remove the air filter by
pulling it straight out of the housing.
8. Install the new air filter with the arrow on the
filter pointing toward the floor.
9. Once the filter is replaced, reinstall the filter
cover, making sure the retaining tabs are fully
secured into their housings.
10. Close the cabin air filter compartment cover,
and reinsert the snaps into their slots. Push
the snap lids until fully attached.
11. Push the glove compartment door to the near
closed position to reengage the glove
compartment travel stops. Finally, pull the
glove compartment tension tether clip down
and slide it back into the slot on the side of the
glove compartment door.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and
rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and
hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically. Use
a lithium-based grease, such as Mopar® Spray
White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to
protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit;
after lubricating, excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given
to hood latching components to ensure proper
function. When performing other underhood
services, the hood latch release mechanism, and
safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring.
Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant,
such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly
into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice
from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine
oil, gasoline, etc.
1 — Filter Cover
2 — Retaining Tabs
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result in
the need to replace it more often.
8
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. If chat-
tering, marks, water lines or wet spots are present,
clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace
the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do
not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is
damaged.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off
of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full
up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, flip up the release tab on the wiper blade
and while holding the wiper arm with one
hand, slide the wiper blade down towards the
base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 255
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the
wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding the
wiper arm with one hand and separating the
wiper blade from the wiper arm with the other
hand (move the wiper blade toward the right
side of the vehicle to separate the wiper blade
from the wiper arm).
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the
tip of the wiper arm with the wiper release tab
open and the blade side of the wiper facing up
and away from the windshield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through
the opening in the wiper blade under the
release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the
wiper arm and rotate the wiper blade until it is
flush against the wiper arm. Fold down the
latch release tab and snap it into its locked
position. Latch engagement will be
accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from
the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be
raised off of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped
first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm
without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may
damage the vehicle.
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
8
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
grab the bottom end of the wiper blade
nearest to wiper arm with your right hand. With
your left hand hold the wiper arm as you pull
the wiper blade away from the wiper arm past
its stop far enough to unsnap the wiper blade
pivot pin from the receptacle on the end of the
wiper arm.
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
snap.
4. Still holding the bottom end of the wiper blade,
move the wiper blade upward and away from
the wiper arm to disengage.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the
glass.
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from
the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be
raised off of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped
first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm
without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may
damage the vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the
opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab the
bottom end of the wiper arm with one hand,
and press the wiper blade flush with the wiper
arm until it snaps into place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap
the wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
4 — Wiper Arm
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 257
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of
the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized
technician inspect the complete exhaust system
and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged,
deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
converter will not require maintenance. However, it
is important to keep the engine properly tuned to
ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent
possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor
may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off
the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a
tune-up to the manufacturer specifications, should
be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmis-
sion is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition compo-
nents disconnected or removed, such as when
diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods
during very rough idle or malfunctioning oper-
ating conditions.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon-
scious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing CO,
Ú page 213 for further
information.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn, such as
grass or leaves, and those items come into
contact with your exhaust system. Do not park
or operate your vehicle in areas where your
exhaust system can contact anything that can
burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an
emissions control device and may seriously
reduce engine performance and cause
serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if
your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
condition. In the event of engine malfunction,
particularly involving engine misfire or other
apparent loss of performance, have your
vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera-
tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction
could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter
and vehicle.
8
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection
every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant is
dirty, the system should be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C
condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the
condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle
rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the
connection at the coolant recovery bottle and
radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO
NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly
could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any
coolant is needed to be added to the system
please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 244.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 299.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
engine coolant, may result in engine damage
and may decrease corrosion protection. OAT
engine coolant is different and should not be
mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is
introduced into the cooling system in an emer-
gency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your
radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from
under the hood, do not open the hood until the
radiator has had time to cool. Never open a
cooling system pressure cap when the radi-
ator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away
from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is
raised. The fan starts automatically and may
start at any time, whether the engine is
running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the igni-
tion to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the igni-
tion is in the ON mode.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 259
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust
inhibitors or anti-rust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant
and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of
propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not
recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze)
can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
important that you use the same engine coolant
(OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout
the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using
OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of
the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
When adding engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact
an authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/engine
coolant solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection
in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in the
area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system, please contact an authorized
dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in
an emergency, have an authorized dealer drain,
flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that
engine coolant will return to the radiator from
the coolant expansion bottle/recovery tank
(if equipped).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there
is any accumulation of foreign material on the
sealing surfaces.
8
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal.
Check with your local authorities to determine the
disposal rules for your community. To prevent
ingestion by animals or children, do not store
ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers
or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If
ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency
assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills
immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick
visual method for determining that the coolant
level is adequate. With the engine off and cold, the
level of the coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should
be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines marked on
the bottle.
As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be
checked once a month.
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant
bottle. Do not overfill.
See an authorized dealer for service.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilo-
meters of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment.
This is normally a result of moisture from rain,
snow, or high humidity accumulating on the
radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat
opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the
vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon
dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant needs to be added, the contents of the
coolant expansion bottle must also be protected
against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure
tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corro-
sion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep
the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever neces-
sary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat.
Other designs may result in unsatisfactory
engine cooling performance, poor gas mileage,
and increased emissions.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never
add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine.
Heat causes pressure to build-up in the
cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 261
(Continued)
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all
brake system components should be inspected
periodically. For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 244.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services or
immediately if the “Brake Warning Light” is
illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area
before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to
bring the fluid level up to the requirements
described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be
checked when pads are replaced. However, low
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup
may be needed.
Use only manufacturer recommended brake fluid
Ú page 300.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in
abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive
lining wear, and possible brake damage. You
would not have your full braking capacity in an
emergency.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer recommended brake
fluid
Ú page 300. Using the wrong type of
brake fluid can severely damage your brake
system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is
also identified on the original factory installed
hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep
the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at
all times. Brake fluid in a open container
absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a
lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil
unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This
could result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts,
causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake
fluid can also damage painted and vinyl
surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its
contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contam-
inate the brake fluid. Brake seal components
could be damaged, causing partial or
complete brake failure. This could result in a
collision.
WARNING!
8
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
using any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do
not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required; therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper
fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the
transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid
to ensure optimum transmission performance and
life. Use only the manufacturer specified
transmission fluid
Ú page 300. It is important to
maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level
using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant should be
used.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage your
transmission components. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An authorized
dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid
level accurately.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than
manufacturer recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or
torque converter shudder
Ú page 300.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 263
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check the
fuse element inside the blade fuse for a break/
melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in
the engine compartment near the battery. This
center contains cartridge fuses, mini-fuses,
micro-fuses, circuit breakers and relays. A label
that identifies each component is printed on the
inside of the cover.
Before any procedure is done on the PDC, make
sure engine is turned off.
Remove the cover by unlatching the two locks
located at each side of the PDC cover, avoid using
screwdrivers or any other tool to remove the cover,
since they may apply excessive force and result in
a broken/damaged part.
After service is done, secure the cover with its two
locks.
NOTE:
The function and amperage of these fuses are
different, depending on vehicle trim level and
content.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same
amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace
a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating.
Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or
any other material. Do not place a fuse inside
a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to
use proper fuses may result in serious
personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems
(air bag system, braking system), power unit
systems (engine system, transmission
system) or steering system blows, contact an
authorized dealer.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse
element
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
element (blown fuse)
8
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Power Distribution Center
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 265
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F06 – – Not Used
F07 – 25 Amp Clear Ignition Coil/Fuel Injector
F08 – – Not Used
F09 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier/Active Noise Control *
F10 – – Not Used
F11 – – Not Used
F12 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor (IBS)
F13 – 10 Amp Red ECM (ESS Only)
F14 – 10 Amp Red ECM
F15 40 Amp Green – CBC Feed #3 (Power Locks)
F16 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM
F17 30 Amp Pink – Starter
F18 40 Amp Green – CBC Feed #4 (Exterior Lighting #1)
F19 25 Amp Clear – 2nd Row Folding Seats Solenoid LT *
F20 – 10 Amp Red A/C Compressor Clutch
F21 25 Amp Clear – 2nd Row Folding Seat Solenoid RT *
F22 – – Not Used
F23 – – Not used
F24 – 20 Amp Yellow RR Wiper
8
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F25A – 10 Amp Red
Handsfree LT & RT RR Door Release
Mod *
F25B – 10 Amp Red Active Grill Shutter/ PWR Mirror *
F26 40 Amp Green – Front HVAC Blower Motor
F27 25 Amp Clear – RR Slide Door Module-RT *
F28A – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Report
F28B – 10 Amp Red USB + AUX Port / Video USB Port
F29 – – Not Used
F30A – 15 Amp Blue Media HUB 1&2 *
F30B – 15 Amp Blue PWR Lumbar SW *
F31 – – Not Used
F32 20 Amp Blue – ECM
F33 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate Module *
F34 25 Amp Clear – RR Door Module-LT *
F35 25 Amp Clear – Sunroof Control Module *
F36 – – Not Used
F37 40 Amp Green – CBC Feed #4 (Exterior Lighting #2)
F38 60 Amp Yellow – Vacuum Cleaner *
F39 25 Amp Clear – Rear HVAC Blower Motor
F40 – – Not Used
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
* If Equipped
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 267
F41 – – Not Used
F42 40 Amp Green – Folding Seat Module *
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor
F44 30 Amp Pink – CBC Feed #1 (Interior Lights)
F45 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter *
F46 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
F47 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module
F48 – – Not Used
F49 25 Amp Clear – RR Sliding Door Module-LT *
F50 25 Amp Clear – RR Door Module-RT *
F51 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper
F52 30 Amp Pink – Brake Vacuum Pump
F53 – – Not Used
F54 40 Amp Green – ESP-ECU And Valves
F55A – 15 Amp Blue
Radio Frequency HUB/ Keyless
Ignition System (KIN) / (Electronic
Steering Lock-BUX ONLY) *
F55B – 15 Amp Blue DVD / Video Routing Module (VRM) *
F56A – 10 Amp Red
Front and Rear HVAC Control Module /
Occupant Classification Module (OCM)/
Electronic Steering Lock (ESL)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F56B – 10 Amp Red ESP/ESC
F57 – – Not Used
F58 – 10 Amp Red
Drive Train Control Mod / Power
Transfer Unit *
F59 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Receptacle *
F60 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Cargo APO
F61 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Stop/Turn *
F62 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Transfer Unit *
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn *
F64 – 15 Amp Blue RT HID Headlamp *
F65 – – Not Used
F66 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/SGW
F67 – 10 Amp Red
Haptic Lane Feedback Module (HALF) /
Parktronics System (PTS)/Drivers Assist
System Module (DASM)
F68 – – Not Used
F69 – – Not Used
F70 – – Not Used
F71 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F72 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors *
F73 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster (EBL)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
* If Equipped
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 269
F74 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup *
F75 – 5 Amp Tan Overhead Console / RR ISC
F76 – 20 Amp Yellow Uconnect/DCSD/Telematics
F77A – 10 Amp Red
RR Entertainment Screen 1 & 2/
Media HUB 1 & 2/3rd Row USB
Charge Only/2nd Row USB Charge
Only/Vacuum Cleaner SW/3rd Row
Recline ST SW/LT & RT Stow N Go
SW/LT & RT Sliding Door SW
Backlight
F77B – 10 Amp Red Rain Sensor/Sunroof /CRVMM
F78A – 15 Amp Blue
Transmission Control Module (TCM)/
E-Shifter
F78B – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster
F79 – 10 Amp Red
ICS/Front And Rear HVAC/ SCCM/
EPB
F80 – – Not Used
F81 – – Not Used
F82 – – Not Used
F83
20 Amp Blue – TT Park Lights *
30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Washer Pump *
F84 30 Amp Pink – Drive Train Control MOD *
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F85 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F86 – – Not Used
F87 – – Not Used
F88 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats *
F89 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats *
F90 – – Not Used
F91 – 15 Amp Blue
Front Ventilated Seats/Heated
Steering Wheel *
F92 – 5 Amp Tan Security Gateway
F93 – – Not Used
F94 40 Amp Green – ESC Motor Pump
F95A – 10 Amp Red USB Charge Port — ACC RUN
F95B – 10 Amp Red
Selectable Fuse Location – USB IP
(Direct) B+
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
* If Equipped
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 271
** 30 Amp mini fuse is substituted for 25 Amp Circuit Breaker.
F96 – 10 Amp Red
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
(Airbag)
F97 – 10 Amp Red
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
(Airbag)
F98 – 15 Amp Blue Left HID Headlamp *
F99 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Module *
F100A – 10 Amp Red
AHLM *
F100B – 10 Amp Red
Rear Camera/LBSS/RBSS/CVPM/
Humidity Sensor/In Vehicle
Temperature Sensor *
Circuit Breakers
CB1 25 Amp Power Seats (Driver)
CB2 25 Amp ** Power Seats (Pass)
CB3 25 Amp
FRT PWR Window W/O Door Nodes +
RR PWR Window Lockout
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers. Some of the inside bulbs are brass or
glass-wedge base. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Center & Rear Dome Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Center & Rear Reading Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Door Courtesy Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Header Reading Lamps – If Equipped LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Instrument Cluster Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Liftgate Lamp(s) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Overhead Console Reading Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Removable Console Lamp – If Equipped LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Visor Vanity Lamps 6501966
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 273
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Halogen Head Lamp
Reflector Low Beam — H11LL
Reflector High Beam — 9005LL
Front Turn Signal Lamp PWY24WNA
Front Side Marker Lamp W3W
Front Park Lamp PWY24WNA
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Stop/Turn Signal Lamp W21/5WLL
Rear Tail/Side Marker Lamp
Rear Tail - Body Side - W21/5WLL
Rear Tail - Liftgate - W5WLL
Rear Side Marker Lamp W3W
Backup Lamp W21W
License Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
8
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP
See below steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Twist the front turn signal lamp socket
assembly counterclockwise, and then remove
the front turn signal lamp assembly from the
lamp housing.
Front Turn Signal Lamp Socket
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the
replacement bulb.
4. Install the front turn signal lamp socket
assembly into the housing, and rotate the front
turn signal lamp socket clockwise to lock it in
place.
FRONT AND REAR SIDE MARKER LAMPS
See below steps to replace:
1. Remove the three fasteners from the inner
wheel liner and carefully peel back liner for
access.
Inner Wheel Liner Fasteners
2. Firmly grab the front side marker lamp socket
and rotate a quarter turn counterclockwise to
remove it from the lamp assembly.
Front Side Marker Lamp Bulb Removal
3. Remove bulb from the front side marker lamp
socket and replace with a new bulb.
4. Install front side marker lamp socket in lamp
assembly and rotate a quarter turn clockwise
to lock into place.
5. Position the inner wheel liner in place and
install the three fasteners.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 275
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-
pean design standards. Tires designed to this
standard have the tire size molded into the side-
wall beginning with the section width. The letter
"P" is absent from this tire size designation.
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. The size designation for
LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pres-
sure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or
“S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall.
Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera-
ture Grades
8
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading,
road conditions, and posted speed limits)
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 277
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including
the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is
not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
8
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could
represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum
of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa
(kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure The manufacturer recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
EXAMPLE:
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 279
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including
the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and
inflate to the recommended pressure for your
vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the
vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your
vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying
capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions,
tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified
on the Tire and Loading Information placard in this
manual
Ú page 128.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading,
and trailer towing,
Ú page 128.
8
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
To determine the maximum loading conditions of
your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading
Information placard. The combined weight of
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue
weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and
there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as
shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
capacities of your vehicle with varying seating
configurations and number and size of occu-
pants. This table is for illustration purposes only
and may not be accurate for the seating and
load carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
865 lbs (392 kg).
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 281
8
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the
steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
uncomfortable ride.
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous.
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle
handling, and increase your stopping distance.
Use tires of the recommended load capacity for
your vehicle. Never overload them.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can
result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes
can cause damage that result in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to
drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 283
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's
side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgment when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated
even when they are underinflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change.
Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure
inside a garage, especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased
by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for
every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature
condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
this normal pressure build-up or your tire pressure
will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct
tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased
tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be
required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if
it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of your
tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch
(6 mm).
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain
on your tires could cause them to fail. You could
have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle
loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
8
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
size and service description (Load Index and
Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor
as well as it is not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of
inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run
Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is
of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire
reaches the Run Flat mode it has limited driving
capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run Flat
tire is changed after driving with underinflated tire
condition, please replace the TPM sensor as it is
not designed to be reused when driven under run
flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at
full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the
run flat mode
Ú page 171.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions,
do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires
should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the tire should be replaced
Ú page 285.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 285
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres-
sures can cause uneven wear patterns to
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V
or higher, and Summer tires typically have a
reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per
the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly
recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing
tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as
little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires
from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of
many characteristics. They should be inspected
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation
pressures. The manufacturer strongly
recommends that you use tires equivalent to the
originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed
Ú page 284. The Load
Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found
on the original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire
Safety Information section of this manual for more
information relating to the Load Index and Speed
Symbol of a tire
Ú page 276.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or
two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever
replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s
specifications match those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement
tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and
ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Failure to follow this warning can result in
sudden tire failure. You could lose control and
have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for your
vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved
tires and wheels may change suspension
dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpre-
dictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a
smaller load index could result in tire over-
loading and failure. You could lose control and
have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in
sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
8
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season tires.
All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S,
M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all
season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in
snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with
Summer tires, be aware these tires are not
designed for Winter or cold driving conditions.
Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient
temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads
are covered with ice or snow. For more
information, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the
tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow
tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified
by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire
sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original
equipment tires. Use snow tires only in
sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over
75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an
authorized tire dealer for recommended safe
operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice,
skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces
may be poorer than that of non-studded tires.
Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local
laws should be checked before using these tire
types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire
Ú page 228.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
Ú page 135.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different
size may result in false speedometer and
odometer readings.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions.
You could lose vehicle control, resulting in
severe injury or death. Driving too fast for
conditions also creates the possibility of loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car
wash with a compact or limited use temporary
spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 287
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If
your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized
tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than one
compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any
given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description
example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump before
lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to
do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to
do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
8
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
not. This spare tire may have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire
needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label
located on the limited use spare wheel. This label
contains the driving limitations for this spare. This
tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to
maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion.
Wash wheels with the same soap solution
recommended for the body of the vehicle and
remember to always wash when the surfaces are
not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt
roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to
wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or
a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from
corroding and tarnishing.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive
more than the speed listed on the limited use
spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressures listed on your Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and
reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or
harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel
cleaners and automatic car washes may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar®
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 289
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.
Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome
Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for
aluminum or chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with
wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the
brakes to remove the water droplets from the
brake components. This activity will remove the
red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle
vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low
Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance,
the following snow traction devices are
recommended. Follow these recommendations to
guard against damage:
Snow traction device must be of proper size for
the tire, as recommended by the snow traction
device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use
with the snow traction device.
Please follow the table below for the recom-
mended tire size, axle and snow traction device:
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives,
or polishing compounds. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
basis; this is all that is required to maintain this
finish.
FWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (maximum
projection beyond tire profile or
equivalent)
L
LX
LXI
Front 235/65R17 9 mm Cable/Chain
8
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, driving, and braking functions. For these
reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as
those on all season type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should
be corrected prior to rotation being performed
Ú page 243.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward
cross” shown in the following diagram. This
rotation pattern does not apply to some directional
tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can cause
unpredictable handling. You could lose control
and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe
the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only traction
devices in good condition are used. Broken
devices can cause serious damage. Stop the
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further
use.
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
Autosock traction devices do not require
retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed of
the device manufacturer’s if it is less than
30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION!
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 291
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,
or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.
8
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three
weeks, we recommend that you take the following
steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle's
battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes in the fresh air and high blower
setting. This will ensure adequate system lubri-
cation to minimize the possibility of compressor
damage when the system is started again.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that
make roads passable in snow and ice and those
that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during
other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in
your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your
vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on
which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold
weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody
protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the
corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal
of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
Stone and gravel impact
Insects, tree sap and tar
Salt in the air near seacoast localities
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible
to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must
be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to
clean the lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or
a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar®
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not
scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out
the paint finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate-
rials such as steel wool or scouring powder
that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal
of paint and decals.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 293
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage
at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be
kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protec-
tive coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon
as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery
and carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the
fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution
or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from
the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace
the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and
if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision,
or if you have questions regarding seat belt or
retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an
authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA
Certified Collision Care Program facility for
inspection.
8
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning
the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching
the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol content
or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small
particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage
the leather upholstery and should be removed
promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be
removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar® Total
Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not
use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,
detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is
designed for easy cleaning, and the manufacturer
recommends Mopar® total care leather cleaner
applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never
use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning the inside rear window equipped with
electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp
instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner
on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not
spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repel-
lents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the
plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the
interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe
away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather
seats, as damage to the seat may result.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
295
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument
panel and is visible from outside of the vehicle
through the windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems
loses normal capability, the remaining system will
still function. However, there will be some loss of
overall braking effectiveness. You may notice
increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off)
the brakes will still function. However, the effort
required to brake the vehicle will be much greater
than that required with the power system
operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and
reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts
should be torqued using a properly calibrated
torque wrench using a six sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil
before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
100 ft-lb
(135 N·m)
M12 x 1.5 19 mm
9
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt
(do not insert it halfway).
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly tightened.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use of
gasoline with a lower than recommended octane
number can cause engine failure and may void or
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as
hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand of
gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
3.6L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater
than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
optimum fuel economy and performance
when using high quality unleaded regular
gasoline having a posted octane number of 87 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
higher octane premium gasoline is not required, as
it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline
in these engines.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline
contains oxygenates and are specifically blended
to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will
provide improved performance and durability of
engine and fuel system components.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow
this warning may result in personal injury.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 297
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with
gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of gasoline with higher ethanol content may void
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on
Poor engine performance
Poor cold start and cold drivability
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane
(LP) may result in damage to the engine,
emissions, and fuel system components. Problems
that result from running CNG or LP are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
M
ANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) IN
G
ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive
that is blended into some gasoline to increase
octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no
performance advantage beyond gasoline of the
same octane number without MMT. Gasoline
blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that
gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The
MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on
the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol,
or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems, damage critical fuel
system components, cause emissions to exceed
the applicable standard, and/or cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please
observe pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
9
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents,
corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce
emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline contains a higher level of
detergents to further aide in minimizing
engine and fuel system deposits. When
available, the usage of TOP TIER Detergent
gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials
intended for gum and varnish removal may contain
active solvents or similar ingredients. These can
harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair
engine performance and damage the emis-
sions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent
burning odor or some light smoke, your engine
may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may
require immediate service. Contact an autho-
rized dealer for service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recom-
mended. Most of these products contain high
concentrations of methanol. Fuel system
damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
tives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 299
FLUID CAPACITIES
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L Engine 19 Gallons 71 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
Cooling System*
3.6L Engine
13.1 Quarts — Standard Duty Cooling
13.4 Quarts — Heavy Duty Cooling
12.4 Liters — Standard Duty Cooling
12.7 Liters — Heavy Duty Cooling
* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
meeting the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
We recommend you use Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which
meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395.
Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the
API Starburst trademark
Ú page 249.
9
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend you use a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine Oil
Filter is unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter
Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% ethanol (Do not use E-85).
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Tech-
nology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze)
is not recommended.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder
We recommend you use Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be
used.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
301
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the
service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your
vehicle's service history. This can often provide a
clue to the current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an
accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the items
in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you
may obtain a rental vehicle (additional charges
may apply). If you need a rental, it is advisable to
make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be
happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your
vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you
get prompt and high quality service. FCA US LLC’s
authorized dealers have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the
latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason
you are still not satisfied, talk to the general
manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They
want to know if you need assistance. If an
authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact FCA US LLC's Customer
Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer
center should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and
office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC C USTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 247-9753
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
French
10
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 247-9753
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties,
FCA US LLC has installed special TDD (Telecommu-
nication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its
customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired
customer, who has access to a TDD or a
conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United
States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by
dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs relay
service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers,
dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay
Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of
unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle
Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended
protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed
by FCA US LLC to provide additional protection
beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you purchased a
Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receive
Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in
the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about the service
contract, call FCA US LLC’s Service Contract
National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001
English / (800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the FCA
US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires,
please refer to the contract documents, and
contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
ensure that you are absolutely delighted with the
ownership experience.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain, or
emit, chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 303
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to
this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.mopar.com/om for further information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties
applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.owners.mopar.ca/en for further
information.
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories
and factory filled fluids are available from an
authorized dealer. They are recommended for your
vehicle to keep it operating at its best and maintain
its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON , D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
10
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either
the website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These
manuals make it easy to find and fix problems on
computer-controlled vehicle systems and features.
They show exactly how to find and correct
problems, using step-by-step troubleshooting and
drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and
a complete list of all tools and equipment.
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with
the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA
vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through
Archway at:
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
305
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes ..........................................295
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .................259
Additives, Fuel .................................................298
Adjust
Down
............................................................42
Forward .........................................................42
Rearward ......................................................42
Up ................................................................. 42
Air Bag .............................................................185
Air Bag Operation ........................................187
Air Bag Warning Light ....................... 185 , 187
Driver Knee Air Bag .....................................191
Enhanced Accident Response .......... 195 , 242
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .........................242
Front Air Bag ...............................................187
If Deployment Occurs .................................194
Knee Impact Bolsters .................................191
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ................196
Maintenance ...............................................196
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ...............185
Side Air Bags ...............................................192
Transporting Pets ........................................214
Air Bag Light ................................... 95 , 185, 214
Air Cleaner, Engine
(Engine Air Cleaner Filter) ................................250
Air Conditioner Maintenance .......................... 251
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ....................251 , 252
Air Conditioner System ................................... 251
Air Conditioning Filter .............................. 66 , 252
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .........................65
Air Filter .......................................................... 250
Air Pressure
Tires
........................................................... 283
Alarm
Arm The System
............................................19
Disarm The System .......................................19
Security Alarm ...............................................98
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle ............................................................8
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...................258 , 299
Disposal ..................................................... 260
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 158
Anti-Lock Warning Light .....................................98
Assist, Hill Start .............................................. 162
Audio Jack .........................................................69
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................... 140
Auto Up Power Windows ....................................73
Automatic Dimming Mirror .................................48
Automatic Headlights ........................................55
Automatic Transaxle ....................................... 111
Automatic Transmission ................................. 113
Adding Fluid ...................................... 262 , 300
Fluid And Filter Change ...............................262
Fluid Change ...............................................262
Fluid Level Check ........................................262
Fluid Type ......................................... 262 , 300
Special Additives ........................................262
AutoPark .........................................................105
AUX Cord ........................................................... 69
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ........... 70
Axle Lubrication ...............................................300
B
Back-Up Camera .............................................126
Battery .....................................................95 , 248
Charging System Light .................................. 95
Jump Starting .............................................234
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ..................... 13
Battery Saver Feature ....................................... 57
Belts, Seat .......................................................214
Blind Spot Monitoring .....................................164
Body Mechanism Lubrication ..........................253
B-Pillar Location ..............................................279
Brake Assist System ........................................159
Brake Control System, Electronic ....................159
Brake Fluid ......................................................300
Brake System ........................................ 261 , 295
Anti-Lock (ABS) ...........................................295
11
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306
Fluid Check
....................................... 261 , 300
Master Cylinder ...........................................261
Parking .......................................................109
Warning Light ................................................ 95
Brake/Transmission Interlock .........................113
Brightness, Interior Lights ................................. 58
Bulb Replacement ................................. 272 , 274
Bulbs, Light .................................. 215 , 272, 274
C
Camera
...........................................................126
Camera, Rear ..................................................126
Capacities, Fluid ..............................................299
Caps, Filler
Fuel
.............................................................127
Oil (Engine) .................................................247
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ........................259
Car Washes .....................................................292
Carbon Monoxide Warning ..............................216
Cargo
Vehicle Loading ............................................ 77
Cargo Area Cover ..............................................77
Cargo Compartment
Luggage Carrier
............................................77
Cargo Load Floor ............................................... 77
Cargo Tie-Downs ............................................... 77
Cellular Phone .................................................157
Certification Label ...........................................128
Chains, Tire .....................................................289
Change Oil Indicator ..........................................87
Changing A Flat Tire ........................................ 220
Chart, Tire Sizing ............................................. 276
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) ........................... 103
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................... 213
Checks, Safety ................................................ 213
Child Restraint ................................................ 197
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ............................................. 200
Center Seat LATCH ..................................... 206
Child Seat Installation ....................... 208 , 210
How To Stow An unused ALR
Seat Belt
................................................ 207
Infant And Child Restraints ........................ 198
Lower Anchors And Tethers For
Children
................................................. 201
Older Children And Child Restraints ........... 199
Seating Positions ....................................... 201
Using The Top Tether Anchorage ................ 211
Clean Air Gasoline .......................................... 296
Cleaning
Wheels ....................................................... 288
Climate Control ..................................................60
Manual ..........................................................60
Rear ..............................................................64
Cold Weather Operation ................................. 107
Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 287
Computer, Trip/Travel ........................................94
Contract, Service ............................................ 302
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .............. 259
Cooling System ...............................................258
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ........................259
Coolant Level ..............................................260
Cooling Capacity .........................................299
Disposal Of Used Coolant ...........................260
Drain, Flush, And Refill ...............................258
Inspection ......................................... 258 , 260
Points To Remember ..................................260
Pressure Cap ..............................................259
Radiator Cap ...............................................259
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...... 258 , 299
Corrosion Protection .......................................292
Cruise Control .................................................119
Cruise Light .....................................................101
Customer Assistance ......................................301
Cybersecurity ..................................................140
D
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights
................... 58
Daytime Running Lights .................................... 54
Dealer Service .................................................249
Defroster, Windshield .....................................214
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ............................... 58
Diagnostic System, Onboard ...........................102
Dimmer Switch
Headlight ...................................................... 54
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) .................................................248
Disable Vehicle Towing ...................................240
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
307
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)
........................260
Door Ajar .................................................... 96 , 97
Door Ajar Light ........................................... 96 , 97
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ................................ 27 , 28
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water
......................................138
E
Electric Brake Control System
.........................159
Anti-Lock Brake System ..............................158
Traction Control System ..............................163
Electric Parking Brake .....................................109
Electric Remote Mirrors ....................................49
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .....................160
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .......... 96
Emergency Braking .........................................170
Emergency Gas Can Refueling ........................236
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher .............................217
Jacking .............................................. 220 , 223
Jump Starting .............................................234
Overheating ................................................237
Towing ........................................................240
Emission Control System Maintenance ...........103
Engine .............................................................247
Air Cleaner ..................................................250
Block Heater ...............................................108
Break-In Recommendations .......................108
Checking Oil Level ...................................... 248
Compartment ............................................. 247
Compartment Identification ....................... 247
Coolant (Antifreeze) .................................... 299
Cooling ....................................................... 258
Exhaust Gas Caution .................................. 216
Fails To Start .............................................. 107
Flooded, Starting ........................................ 107
Fuel Requirements ..................................... 296
Oil ......................................................249 , 299
Oil Filler Cap ............................................... 247
Oil Filter ...................................................... 250
Oil Selection ...................................... 249 , 299
Oil Synthetic ............................................... 250
Overheating ................................................ 237
Starting ...................................................... 104
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature
..................................................195 , 242
Ethanol ........................................................... 297
Exhaust Gas Cautions ..................................... 216
Exhaust System ..................................... 216 , 256
Exterior Lighting ....................................... 54 , 274
Exterior Lights ........................54 , 215, 272, 274
F
Filters
Air Cleaner
.................................................. 250
Air Conditioning ................................... 66 , 252
Engine Oil ..........................................250 , 299
Engine Oil Disposal .................................... 250
Flashers
Hazard Warning ..........................................217
Turn Signals ...................... 54 , 101, 215, 274
Flash-To-Pass ............................................. 54 , 55
Flat Tire Changing ........................ 220 , 275, 286
Flat Tire Stowage ......................... 228 , 275, 286
Flooded Engine Starting ..................................107
Fluid Capacities ...............................................299
Fluid Leaks ......................................................215
Fluid Level Checks
Brake
..........................................................261
Engine Oil ...................................................248
Fluid, Brake .....................................................300
Fog Lights ................................................... 54 , 56
Fold In Floor (Stow ‘n Go) Seating ..................... 36
Fold-Flat Seats .................................................. 27
Forward Collision Warning ...............................168
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...................................239
Front Position Light .........................................274
Fuel .................................................................296
Additives .....................................................298
Clean Air .....................................................296
Ethanol .......................................................297
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ....................................127
Gasoline .....................................................296
Materials Added .........................................298
Methanol ....................................................297
Octane Rating ................................... 296 , 299
Requirements .............................................296
Specifications .............................................299
11
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308
Tank Capacity
.............................................299
Fuses ..............................................................263
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)
...................... 50
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) .................................127
Gasoline, (Fuel) ...............................................296
Gasoline, Clean Air ..........................................296
Gasoline, Reformulated ..................................296
Gear Ranges ...................................................113
Glass Cleaning ................................................294
Gross Axle Weight Rating ................................130
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ...........................130
GVWR ..............................................................128
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising,
Or Shallow Standing Water
.....................138
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................217
Head Restraints ................................................44
Headlights ......................................................... 54
Cleaning ......................................................292
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ............ 54
Lights On Reminder ............................... 54 , 56
Passing .................................................. 54 , 55
Switch ........................................................... 54
Time Delay ....................................................54
Heated Mirrors ..................................................48
Heated Seats .................................................... 43
Heater, Engine Block ...................................... 108
Hill Start Assist ............................................... 162
Hitches
Trailer Towing ............................................. 131
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .......................50
Hood Prop ..........................................................74
Hood Release ....................................................74
I
Ignition ...............................................................15
Switch ...........................................................15
Inside Rearview Mirror ............................. 48 , 217
Instrument Cluster ......................................83 , 85
Descriptions ............................................... 101
Display ..........................................................85
Display Controls ............................................86
KeySense Message .......................................87
Menu Items ...................................................88
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ..................... 294
Interior And Instrument Lights ...........................57
Interior Appearance Care ................................ 293
Interior Lights ....................................................57
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ....................58
J
Jack Location .................................................. 221
Jack Operation ................................................ 220
Jump Starting ................................................. 234
K
Key Fob ............................................................. 12
Arm The System ............................................ 19
Disarm The Alarm ......................................... 19
Programming Additional Key Fobs ................ 14
Key Fob Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) ..................................... 13
Key Fob Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) ..................................... 14
Keyless Enter 'n Go™ ........................................ 21
Passive Entry ................................................ 21
Keys .................................................................. 12
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals
......................... 54
Lane Change Assist .................................... 54 , 57
Lap/Shoulder Belts .........................................176
Latches ...........................................................215
Hood .............................................................74
Lead Free Gasoline .........................................296
Leaks, Fluid .....................................................215
Life Of Tires .....................................................285
Liftgate .............................................................. 75
Power ............................................................ 76
Light Bulbs ............................................ 215 , 274
Lights ..............................................................215
Air Bag ........................................95 , 185, 214
Battery Saver ................................................ 57
Brake Assist Warning ..................................162
Brake Warning .............................................. 95
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
309
Bulb Replacement
............................ 272 , 274
Cruise .........................................................101
Daytime Running .......................................... 54
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ............................ 54
Engine Temperature Warning .......................97
Exterior ............................................. 215 , 274
Fog................................................................ 56
Headlights ............................................. 54 , 55
High Beam/Low Beam Select .......................54
Instrument Cluster ........................................ 54
Intensity Control ............................................58
Interior ..........................................................57
Lights On Reminder ............................... 54 , 56
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ........... 99
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) .............. 58
Park ............................................................101
Passing .................................................. 54 , 55
Reading ........................................................ 57
Seat Belt Reminder ....................................... 97
Security Alarm ............................................... 98
Service ........................................................272
Side Marker ................................................274
Traction Control ..........................................162
Turn Signals ...................... 54 , 101, 215, 274
Warning Instrument
Cluster Descriptions
........................97 , 101
Load Floor, Cargo ..............................................77
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode ......................... 93
Load Shed Battery Saver On ............................. 93
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ................ 93
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ................93
Loading Vehicle ....................................... 77 , 128
Tires ........................................................... 279
Low Tire Pressure System ............................... 171
Lubrication, Body ............................................ 253
Lug Nuts ......................................................... 295
Luggage Carrier .................................................77
M
Maintenance Free Battery .............................. 248
Maintenance Schedule ................................... 243
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine)
........................................ 99 , 103
Manual
Park Release
.............................................. 238
Service ....................................................... 304
Map/Reading Lights ..........................................57
Marker Lights, Side ......................................... 274
Media Hub .........................................................69
Memory Seat .....................................................49
Methanol ........................................................ 297
Mini-Trip Computer ............................................94
Mirrors ...............................................................48
Automatic Dimming .......................................48
Electric Remote .............................................49
Exterior Folding .............................................50
Heated ..........................................................48
Outside ...................................................48 , 49
Rearview ............................................. 48 , 217
Vanity ............................................................48
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle ............................................................ 8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ........................171
Mopar Parts ....................................................303
MP3 Control ...................................................... 69
Multi-Function Control Lever ............................. 54
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period ...........................108
O
Occupant Restraints
.......................................174
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .............. 296 , 299
Oil Change Indicator .......................................... 87
Reset ............................................................ 87
Oil Filter, Change .............................................250
Oil Filter, Selection ..........................................250
Oil Pressure Light .............................................. 97
Oil, Engine ............................................. 249 , 299
Capacity ......................................................299
Checking .....................................................248
Dipstick .......................................................248
Disposal ......................................................250
Filter ................................................. 250 , 299
Filter Disposal .............................................250
Identification Logo ......................................249
Materials Added To .....................................250
Pressure Warning Light ................................. 97
Recommendation ............................. 249 , 299
Synthetic .....................................................250
11
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309
310
Viscosity
......................................................299
Onboard Diagnostic System ............................102
Operating Precautions .....................................102
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual
..........................................304
Outside Rearview Mirrors ........................... 48 , 49
Overheating, Engine ........................................237
P
Paint Care .......................................................292
Parking Brake ..................................................109
ParkSense System, Rear .................................121
Passive Entry ..................................................... 21
Pets .................................................................214
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ............279
Power
Brakes
........................................................295
Mirrors .......................................................... 49
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .................. 70
Seats ............................................................41
Steering ......................................................116
Power Seats
Down ............................................................ 42
Forward .........................................................42
Rearward ......................................................42
Up ................................................................. 42
Power Sliding Door
On / Off Switch ...................................... 24 , 76
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ....................182
Preparation For Jacking ..................................221
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ................................................... 182
R
Radial Ply Tires
............................................... 283
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............. 259
Radio Operation .............................................. 157
Rear Air Conditioning .........................................64
Rear Cross Path .............................................. 167
Rear ParkSense System ................................. 121
Rear Seat Reminder ....................................... 159
Rear Seat Removal ............................................30
Rear View ..........................................................48
Reclining Front Seats .........................................28
Recreational Towing ....................................... 137
Reformulated Gasoline ................................... 296
Refrigerant ...................................................... 252
Release, Hood ...................................................74
Reminder, Lights On ..........................................54
Reminder, Seat Belt ....................................... 175
Remote Control
Starting System
.............................................17
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm
...............................................19
Disarm The Alarm ..........................................19
Programming Additional Key Fobs ................14
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode ................................18
Uconnect Customer Programmable
Features
...................................................18
Uconnect Settings ........................................ 18
Remote Starting System ................................... 17
Replacement Bulbs .........................................272
Replacement Tires ..........................................285
Reporting Safety Defects ................................303
Restraints, Child ..............................................197
Restraints, Head ............................................... 44
Roof Luggage Rack ........................................... 77
Rotation, Tires .................................................290
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle
..........................214
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ........................215
Safety Defects, Reporting ...............................303
Safety Information, Tire ...................................275
Safety Tips ......................................................213
Safety, Exhaust Gas ........................................216
Schedule, Maintenance ..................................243
Seat Belt Reminder ........................................... 97
Seat Belts .............................................. 175 , 214
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ............................179
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .......179
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage
..............................................179
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) .............182
Child Restraints ..........................................197
Energy Management Feature .....................182
Extender .....................................................181
Front Seat ................................ 175 , 176, 178
Inspection ...................................................214
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310
311
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation
......................178
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting .....................178
Lap/Shoulder Belts .....................................176
Operating Instructions ................................178
Pregnant Women ........................................182
Pretensioners .............................................182
Rear Seat ....................................................176
Reminder ....................................................175
Seat Belt Extender ......................................181
Seat Belt Pretensioner ................................182
Untwisting Procedure ..................................178
Seat Belts Maintenance ..................................293
Seats ................................................... 27 , 42, 43
Adjustment ....................... 27 , 28, 29, 30, 42
Bench ........................................................... 30
Heated ..........................................................43
Power ............................................................41
Rear Folding ................................................. 27
Reclining .......................................................28
Seatback Release ........................... 28 , 29, 30
Stow ‘n Go (Fold in Floor) .............................. 36
Tilting .............................................. 27 , 28, 29
Security Alarm ................................................... 98
Arm The System ............................................19
Disarm The System ....................................... 19
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................299
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ................................... 15
Service Assistance ..........................................301
Service Contract ..............................................302
Service Manuals ..............................................304
Shifting
Automatic Transmission ............................. 113
Shoulder Belts ................................................ 176
Side View Mirror Adjustment .............................48
Signals, Turn ..........................54 , 101, 215, 274
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .............................. 289
Snow Tires ...................................................... 286
Spare Tire Changing ....................................... 220
Spare Tire Stowage ......................................... 228
Spare Tires ......................... 221 , 286, 287, 288
Specifications
Oil ............................................................... 299
Speed Control
Cancel ........................................................ 120
Resume ...................................................... 120
Starting .................................................... 17 , 104
Button ...........................................................15
Cold Weather ............................................. 107
Engine Fails To Start .................................. 107
Remote .........................................................17
Starting And Operating ................................... 104
Starting Procedures ........................................ 104
Steering .......................................................... 116
Tilt Column ....................................................26
Wheel, Heated ...............................................26
Wheel, Tilt .....................................................26
Stow ‘n Go (Fold In Floor) Seats .........................36
Stuck, Freeing ................................................. 239
Sunglasses Storage ...........................................67
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag ...... 185
Sway Control, Trailer .......................................164
Symbol Glossary .................................................. 8
Synthetic Engine Oil ........................................250
System, Remote Starting ..................................17
T
Telescoping Steering Column
............................ 26
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ..................................... 77
Tilt Steering Column .......................................... 26
Time Delay
Headlight
...................................................... 54
Tire And Loading Information Placard .............279
Tire Markings ..................................................275
Tire Safety Information ....................................275
Tire Service Kit ................................................228
Tire Stowage ...................................................228
Tires ...........................215 , 282, 286, 287, 291
Aging (Life Of Tires) .....................................285
Air Pressure ................................................282
Chains ........................................................289
Changing ....................................................220
Compact Spare ...........................................287
General Information ................ 282 , 286, 287
High Speed .................................................283
Inflation Pressure .......................................283
Jacking .............................................. 220 , 223
Life Of Tires ................................................285
Load Capacity .............................................279
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
....................................88 , 100, 171
11
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311
312
Quality Grading
...........................................291
Radial .........................................................283
Replacement ..............................................285
Rotation ......................................................290
Safety ............................................... 275 , 282
Sizes ...........................................................276
Snow Tires ..................................................286
Spare Tires .....................221 , 286, 287, 288
Spinning ......................................................284
Trailer Towing .............................................135
Tread Wear Indicators ................................284
Wheel Nut Torque .......................................295
To Open Hood ...................................................74
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .........................134
Towing .............................................................129
Disabled Vehicle .........................................240
Guide ..........................................................132
Recreational ...............................................137
Weight ........................................................132
Towing Behind A Motorhome ..........................137
Traction ...........................................................138
Traction Control ...............................................163
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ...............................164
Trailer Towing ..................................................129
Hitches .......................................................131
Minimum Requirements .............................134
Tips .............................................................136
Trailer And Tongue Weight ..........................134
Wiring .........................................................135
Trailer Towing Guide ........................................132
Trailer Weight ................................................. 132
Transaxle
Automatic
................................................... 111
Operation ................................................... 111
Transmission .................................................. 113
Automatic .......................................... 113 , 262
Maintenance .............................................. 262
Transporting Pets ........................................... 214
Tread Wear Indicators .................................... 284
Turn Signals .................................... 54 , 101, 274
U
Uconnect
Uconnect Settings
.........................................18
Uconnect 4C/4C Nav With
8.4-Inch Display .............................................. 141
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features
........18, 21
Passive Entry Programming ...........................21
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ............................ 291
Universal Garage Door Opener
(Homelink®) — If Equipped
b
........................50
Unleaded Gasoline ......................................... 296
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ..................... 178
USB....................................................................69
V
Vanity Mirrors ....................................................48
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................ 295
Vehicle Loading .....................................128 , 279
Vehicle Maintenance ......................................249
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ....................... 8
Voice Command ................................................ 47
Voice Recognition System (VR) ......................... 47
W
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Descriptions)
..................... 98
Warning Lights And Messages .......................... 95
Warranty Information ......................................303
Washers, Windshield .......................................248
Washing Vehicle ..............................................292
Water
Driving Through ..........................................138
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .............................288
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim .............................288
Wind Buffeting .................................................. 74
Window Fogging ................................................ 65
Windows ............................................................ 72
Power ............................................................ 72
Windshield Defroster ......................................214
Windshield Washers ................................58 , 248
Fluid............................................................248
Windshield Wiper Blades ................................253
Wipers Blade Replacement .............................253
Wipers, Intermittent .......................................... 58
Wrecker Towing ...............................................240
22_RUVG_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in
an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that
may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation
or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also
dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation,
pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while
driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Chrysler
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca
(Canada) or your local Chrysler brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far
below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend, or use
public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway motor vehicle can
expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure,
avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle.
This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them
on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in
substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/
Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet by calling 1-800-247-9753 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
SCAN FOR THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
CanadaU. S.
mopar.com/om
First Edition
_RUV_OM_EN_US
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or
scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Chrysler brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make
and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “Chrysler” (U.S. residents only).
©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
2022 Chrysler Voyager
OWNER’S MANUAL
CHRYSLER VOYAGER
